Telenetics
RD
TD
TR
CD
RI/OH
3260
RC/NC
326X V.34, V.34-SDC, and V.32bis Series Modem
User’s Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice (continued)
Proprietary Material
Information and software in this document are proprietary to Telenetics Corporation (or its
Suppliers) and without the express prior permission of an officer of Telenetics Corporation,
may not be copied, reproduced, disclosed to others, published, or used, in whole or in part,
for any purpose other than that for which it is being made available. Use of software
described in this document is subject to the terms and conditions of the Telenetics Software
License Agreement.
This document is for information purposes only and is subject to change without notice.
Radio Frequency Interference Regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications.
Note: the 3262/63/67/68 Modem is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this prod-
uct may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate
measures.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Telenetics could void the user's author-
ity to operate the equipment.
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing
Equipment Regulations.
This is a Class A product. Operation of this equipment in a residential environment may
cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures to
correct the interference at his/her own expense.
This product is CISPR 22 Class B verified under test conditions that included use of shielded
DTE cables. Ferrite cylinders attached to the dial line are required for Modem 3266 (Can-
ada). Leased line cables with 1.5 turns through a ferrite cylinder were also used. Use of dif-
ferent cables will invalidate verification and increase the risk of causing interference to radio
and TV reception.
You can obtain the proper cables from Telenetics.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This product is CE marked to indicate compliance with the following European directives.
• 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive (Safety)
• 89/336/EEC EEC Directive
Compliance with the above directives may only be assured when the equipment is installed
and operated in accordance with the instructions for its use and the purpose for which it is
intended.
Products that do not bear the CE mark are not intended for supply or use in the European
Union.
Part No. TEL–T0009, Rev A
Publication Code: DS
First Printing: January 2001
Manual is current for Release 8.0 of the 326X Series Modem.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents
V.25bis ACU .............................................................................................
LPDA2 ACU ............................................................................................
Restoring Data Transmission ........................................................................
Remote Configuration ..................................................................................
Status Snapshots ...........................................................................................
Country-Specific Information .......................................................................
Unpacking the Modem .................................................................................
Connecting the Modem ................................................................................
Cabling the Modem ..................................................................................
After Installing the Modem... .......................................................................
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents (continued)
Software ...............................................................................................
Operating Notes .......................................................................................
What is an Option Set? .............................................................................
4-2
4-16
(Models 3260/62/65/67) ......................................................................
(Models 3261/63/66/68) ......................................................................
Remote Access Reset ...................................................................................
4-19
4-20
4-21
Using AT Commands ....................................................................................
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents (continued)
Performing Numeric Entry ...........................................................................
Cable Considerations ...............................................................................
vii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents (continued)
Delayed and Forbidden Lists ........................................................................
Rear Panel Pinouts ...................................................................................
Telco Option (AT&J) ................................................................................
U. S. A. .........................................................................................................
Dial Line Jack Types ................................................................................
Rear Panel Pinouts ...................................................................................
Telco Option (AT&J) ................................................................................
Declaring The Jack Type ..............................................................................
viii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents (continued)
Expiration of Lease ..................................................................................
ix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Documentation Set
Overview
The 326X product documentation set includes the 326X V.34 Series Modem
Reference Card (TEL–T0009-01).
Optionally, with a 326X Series Modem card backplane (to install a 326X card into a
Modular Nest 9 or 21 enclosure), you receive the following:
• 326X Series Modem Cards (Part No. TEL–09949)
Throughout this guide, references to the 326X Series Modem apply to 326X V.32bis,
326X V.34, and 326X-SDC Series Modems, unless stated otherwise.
326X Series Modem Family
The 326X product family consists of three series: V. 34, V. 34 SDC, and V. 32bis.
Supports This This Maximum And This Maximum
This Series...
326XFAST V.34
326XFAST-SDC
Modulation...
DCE Rate...
DTE Rate:
ITU V.34
33.6 kbps
128 kbps, asynchronous
ITU V.34
33.6 kbps
128 kbps, asynchronous, and,
with proprietary compression,
128 kbps synchronous
326X
ITU V.32bis
14.4 kbps
57.6 kbps, asynchronous
IMPORTANT: When you select a modulation mode, you must ensure that the Max
Rate (AT*MX) and Min Rate (AT*MN) parameter options are within the valid range
for the mode.
Some 326XFAST-SDC models are available with a V.35-compatible interface. This
unit has a DB25 connector, so a converter is required.
Product Family Model Numbers
Telenetics refers to the product family as 326X because the last digit denotes the
modem model. Model numbers (“X”) are as follows.
This Model Number... Denotes:
3260, 3261, 3262, 3263
3265, 3266, 3267, 3268
Models for use in the U.S.A.
Equivalent models, respectively, for international use;
provided in country-specific setups
3260, 3265
Standalone models for:
• Two-wire dial operation
• Two-wire leased-line operation
xi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Documentation Set (continued)
This Model Number... Denotes:
3261, 3266
Standalone models for:
• Two-wire dial operation
• Two- or four-wire leased-line operation
3262, 3267
3263, 3268
Rack-mount dual-modem card models, equivalent to 3260
and 3265, respectively, for Modular Nest enclosure installation
Rack-mount single-modem card models, equivalent to the
3266 for Modular Nest enclosure installation
Documentation Target Audience
The documentation set assumes that you are familiar with the basic concepts of data
communications, that you are an operator only, and that you will not be servicing the
modem hardware (other than making initial cabling connections).
Note to Programmers and System Developers
For detailed information on configuration options, equivalentAT Commands, V.25
bis Automatic-Calling Unit, NetView’s LPDA-2 dialing commands, or diagnostic
tests, order the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide (Part No. TEL–09925) by con-
tacting your Telenetics sales representative or local distributor.
How to Use the Documentation Set
Following is a description of the 326X Series Modem documentation set.
326X V.34 Series Modem Reference Card (TEL–T0009-01)
For a quick reference to AT, AT&, and AT commands, dial modifiers, and
*
disconnect codes, see the 326X V.34 Series Modem Reference Card. The card also
includes a menu tree of front panel options andAT command settings.
xii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Documentation Set (continued)
326X V.34 Series Modem User’s Guide (TEL–T0009)
This User’s Guide provides the information needed to install, configure, and operate
the modem. Chapter outlines are as follows:
Chapter 1, About the Modem, introduces the modem’s features.
Chapter 2, Installing the Modem, explains how to install and cable a modem.
Quick-reference figures showing the connections to make are included.
recommends how to configure and operate it. The chapter includes a reference
guide to the rest of the documentation set for further information.
modem. The four preconfigured option sets are described, along with sample
applications that help you choose an option set.
Chapter 5, Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface, discusses the 326X Series
Modem’s AT ACU. This chapter introduces:
• The ACU industry-standard (AT and AT&) commands
• The Telenetics enhanced AT command syntax (AT*).
• The AT commands that are referred to as “action” AT commands (rather than
“configuration” AT commands), and S-Register functions and settings
suggestions for correcting them. This chapter assists you in isolating and
correcting a problem before calling Telenetics’ Customer Support Center.
need to change a modem’s default settings. It describes:
— Configuration options with and without AT equivalents
— Result codes (long and short forms)
— S-Registers
— Dial modifiers
— Numeric entry procedure
— The configuration menu structure
Appendix B, Cabling and Interface Pinouts, contains the pinouts for the
modem’s rear panel connectors and associated cables.
layouts, pinouts and other modem features that are required or restricted by
regulatory agencies for each country.
xiii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Documentation Set (continued)
326X Series Modem Reference Guide (TEL–09925)
Available as an optional order item, the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide is
designed for users who require more detail on operating the modem’s configuration
options and diagnostic self-tests. Contact your Telenetics sales representative or local
distributor for ordering information.
References
Refer to the following documents for more information:
• 326X, 326XFAST, and 326XFAST-SDC Series Modem Product Specification
Sheets
• EIA Application Note #562, Appendix A (defines cable lengths in terms of
DTE rates)
NetView operators should be familiar with:
• NetView Operations Primer (IBM Part No. SC30-3363)
• NetView Operation Scenarios (IBM Part No. SC30-3376)
Trademarks
The following are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies
or organizations:
AT is a command language used with the Smartmodem 1200 and the
Smartmodem 2400/Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.
CompuServ / CompuServ Inc.
MNP (Microcom Networking Protocol) and Relay Gold / Microcom, Inc.
NetView and IBM / International Business Machines Corporation
Novell and NetWare / Novell, Inc
Telenet / Sprint International Communications Corporation
Tymnet / British Telecommunications
UNIX / Unix System Laboratories
xiv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Documentation Set (continued)
Conventions
The following conventions are used in this manual:
• User entries appear as follows: AT T<CR>
*
• System messages appear as follows: NO CARRIER
• A carriage return appears as follows: <CR>. It designates the Return or Enter
key. It is used to complete a text entry or initiate an action from the keyboard.
Special Notices
These notices emphasize certain information in the manual. Each serves a special
purpose and is displayed in the format shown.
IMPORTANT: Important is used to emphasize any significant procedural
information.
Caution
Caution provides information that, if not followed, can result
in damage to software, hardware, or data.
Warning
Warning is the most serious notice, indicating that you can be
physically hurt.
xv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Documentation Set (continued)
Messages spéciaux
Les messages suivants mettent en valeur certaines informations dans le guide.
Chacun d’eux remplit une fonction spéciale et est affiché dans le format indiqué.
IMPORTANT: Important est utilisé pour souligner des informations critiques au
sujet d’une procédure.
Mise en Garde
Une mise en garde vous fournit des informations qui, si elles
ne sont pas observées, peuvent se traduire par des dommages
pour le logiciel, le matériel ou les données.
Avertissement
Un avertissement constitue le message le plus sérieux,
indiquant que vous pouvez subir des blessures corporelles.
Besondere Hinweise
Durch die folgenden Hinweise werden bestimmte Informationen in diesem Handbuch hervorgehoben. Jeder
Hinweis dient einem bestimmten Zweck und wird im dargestellten Format angezeigt.
WICHTIG: Wichtig wird zur Betonung signifikanter Angaben zu Vorgehensweisen
verwendet.
Vorsicht
Ein Vorsichtshinweis macht Sie darauf aufmerksam, daß
Nichtbefolgung zu Software-, Hardware- oder Datenschäden
führen kann.
Warnung
Eine Warnung weist Sie darauf hin, daß ernsthafte
Körperverletzungsgefahr besteht.
xvi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Documentation Set (continued)
Avisos Especiales
Los siguientes avisos hacen hincapié en determinada información de la guía.
Cada uno de ellos tiene un propósito especial y aparecen con el formato
siguiente:
IMPORTANTE: Importante se utiliza para enfatizar cualquier información de
procedimiento importante.
Precaucion
La precaución le ofrece información, que de no cumplirse,
puede derivar en posibles daños tanto para el software y el
hardware, como para ambos.
!
Advertencia!
Una advertencia es un aviso importante, que le advierte sobre
la presencia de un inminente peligro.
xvii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telenetics Customer Information
Introduction
U.S.A. customers who have questions about Telenetics products or services should
refer to the following sections. Non-U.S.A. customers should contact their local
Telenetics subsidiary office or distributor.
Questions about Your Product Shipment
If you have questions about whether your shipment is complete or about its condition
upon receipt, please call your nearest Telenetics representative.
Technical Assistance or Scheduling Service
To have Telenetics implement your equipment:
You can purchase and schedule Implementation Services by calling (949) 455-4000
(from within the U.S.). The average lead time for implementation services is 5
business days from the time of the call. Implementation services include running
power-up diagnostics, configuring the equipment, and connecting the equipment into
existing networks. A service engineer will be dispatched to your site to perform these
services.
If you implement your equipment yourself:
Carefully follow the instructions in the following sections of this documentation set:
To install and power up — Chapter 2.
To configure and operate — Chapter 3.
If you have difficulty — Chapter 6 provides a quick reference to problems you
may encounter, and suggestions for correcting them.
xix
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telenetics Customer Information (continued)
For service, if your unit is under warranty and/or you have a service contract:
Call (949) 455-4000. When you call, please have the following information ready:
Item
Location or Description
Model number
Front of unit. 3260, 3261, 3262, 3263, 3265, 3266, 3267, 3268.
(For synchronous data compression models, specify SDC.)
Serial number
Bottom of standalone unit; edge of card unit.
LCD Display.
Error message/
Problem Description
Software revision
LCD Display: from [Modulation Mode] 9600 T/D? press
to
display the operating status. (Example: DTE 19.2 RELIABL.)
Press
Press
until Display Modem ID displays.
. SWPart=x displays.
The rightmost two digits show the revision level.
Option Settings
Site ID
Up-to-date configuration worksheet (see the 326X Series Modem
Reference Guide).
Assigned to the customer site by Telenetics at first service call.
Customer should store the ID, once assigned.
Application type
Leased line with or without dial restoral or dial. Also specify the
data transfer protocol: asynchronous, direct-synchronous, or
synchronous data compression (SDC) mode.
Connected hardware
DTE type(s): asynchronous or synchronous terminal or PC.
If you do not have a service contract, and your unit is no longer under warranty:
You can purchase a service contract or arrange for Time and Material services by
calling (949) 455-4000.
Sales-Related Issues
Call your local Telenetics sales office or authorized distributor. For a listing of our
Sales Offices, visit our Web site at: http://www.telenetics.com.
Comments about the Manual
To help us improve our product documentation, please complete and return by mail,
or fax to (949) 455-4010, the prepaid comment card on the next page. If you prefer,
simply include your name, company, and telephone number and a member of the
documentation group will contact you to discuss any comments you might have.
xx
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
About the Modem
Contents
V.25bis ACU .............................................................................................
LPDA2 ACU ............................................................................................
Restoring Data Transmission ........................................................................
Remote Configuration ..................................................................................
Status Snapshots ...........................................................................................
Country-Specific Information .......................................................................
About the Modem 1-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This chapter summarizes the features and options of the 326X Series Modem. The
series includes:
• The 326X V.32bis Series Modem, which operates in V.32bis modulation mode
• The 326XFAST Series Modem, which can operate in V.34 modulation mode
• The 326XFAST-SDC Series Modem, which can operate in V.34 modulation
mode and the Synchronous Data Compression mode
In this guide, references to the modem apply to all of the above, unless stated
otherwise.
IMPORTANT: When you select a modulation mode, you must ensure that the Max
Rate (AT*MX) and Min Rate (AT*MN) parameter options are within the valid range
for the mode.
The modem provides reliable data communication over 2-wire dial lines and 2-wire
or 4-wire leased lines, depending on the model. Dial lines are public lines to which
all telephone users have access; leased lines, also called private lines, provide a
dedicated connection, over lines provided by the telephone company.
Whether you use dial or leased lines, you can operate the modem as follows:
• Using the front panel: control keys and liquid-crystal display (LCD)
• Using industry-standard (AT and AT&), and Telenetics-enhanced (AT ) AT
*
commands from an attached terminal, or commands from an asynchronous
communications software package running on an attached PC
• From a network management system (NMS)
• Using call establishment methods, such as V.25bis or LPDA2 automatic call
units (ACUs)
high-density nest cards, which offer the same features, and can be installed in Tele-
netics’s Modular Nest 9-slot and Modular Nest 21-slot rack-mounted enclosures.
1-2 About the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RD TR RI/OH
TD CD RC/NC
3260
Figure 1-1. 326X Series Modem, Standalone Desktop Model
Safety and Operational Notices
Repair
Warning
Do not attempt to repair the modem or enclosure. They contain no
electronic components that can be serviced or replaced by a user.
Any attempt at user service of the 326X enclosure, or opening of
the 326X unit, voids the product warranty.
Avertissement
N’essayez pas de réparer le modem ou le boîtier. Ils ne contiennent
aucun composant électronique pouvant êtreréparé ou remplacé par
un usager. Toute tentative de réparation du boîtier du 326X par un
usager, ou toute intervention à l’intérieur du 326X, annule la garan-
tie du produit.
Warnung
Versuchen Sie nicht, das Modem oder sein Gehäuse zu reparieren.
Es sind keine durch den Benutzer wartungs- oder austauschfähige
Teile darin enthalten. Bei jeglichem Öffnen oder Wartungsversuch
am 326X bzw.
About the Modem 1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lightning
Warning
All Telenetics devices should be used in environments designed for
computers and electronic equipment. In areas susceptible to
lightning, take precautions to prevent damage to electronic
equipment. Contact your telephone company, or an electronic
accessories vendor, for information on lightning protection
equipment. Customers experiencing problems caused by surges
from lightning have eliminated such problems by installing
appropriate surge suppressors on power and data lines connected to
Telenetics devices.
Avertissement
Tous les dispositifs Telenetics doivent être utilisés dans des
environnements conçus pour des ordinateurs et du matériel
électronique. Dans les zones susceptibles d’être frappées par la
foudre, prenez des précautions pour éviter que le matériel
électronique soit endommagé. Contactez votre compagnie
téléphonique, ou un vendeur d’accessoires électroniques, pour
obtenir des renseignements concernant les systèmes de protection
contre la foudre. Certains usagers confrontés à des problèmes
causés par des sautes de tension dues à la foudre ont éliminé ces
problèmes en installant des régulateurs de tension appropriés sur
les câbles électriques et les câbles de données reliés aux dispositifs
Telenetics.
Warnung
Telenetics-Geräte sind grundsätzlich in für Rechner und
elektronische Anlagen vorgesehenen Umgebungen zu verwenden.
In unwettergefährdeten Bereichen ist jegliche Elektronik gegen
Blitzeinwirkung zu schützen. Näheres über entsprechende
Schutzeinrichtungen erfahren Sie von Ihrer Telefongesellschaft
oder einem Elektrohändler. Probleme mit Spannungsstößen durch
Blitzeinwirkung lassen sich durch Einbau von
Überspannungsableitern in die zu Telenetics-Geräten führenden
Netz- und Datenleitungen beheben.
Operating the Modem from the Front Panel
The front panel menus are organized functionally so that operation is easy for novice
and advanced users.
1-4 About the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting Programmed Option Sets
Option sets make it easy to use a modem with common applications, including:
• Asynchronous and synchronous answering
• Asynchronous and synchronous dialing
• Leased line with dial restoral operation
Four sets of options are stored in nonvolatile memory. If none is appropriate to an
application, you can customize an option set, and save it in nonvolatile memory.
Automatic Calling Interfaces (ACUs)
The modem supports three automatic calling interfaces (also known as Auto-Call
Units). ACUs let you execute functions directly from a keyboard.
AT ACU
The asynchronous AT ACU is compatible with the industry-standard AT command
set. AT Commands provide a standard modem communications interface, allowing
you to configure and operate your modem from a terminal or PC keyboard.
Using the AT-compatible command set (AT and AT&), you can, for example, dial
and receive phone calls. Telenetics’ extended AT command set (AT ) includes other
*
important parameters used in configuring advanced modem features.
V.25bis ACU
For sync or async auto-calling, use the ITU-T V.25bis compliant ACU.
With either the AT or V.25bis ACU, you can store, dial, or change up to nine phone
numbers in the modem's electronic telephone book, directly from your terminal.
Refer to Chapter 3, Automatic Calling Interfaces, in the 326X Series Modem
Reference Guide, for details.
LPDA2 ACU
The LPDA2 feature lets you use IBM dial and leased line restoral applications with
LPDA2 Dial and Disconnect commands. LPDA2 allows Netview and other IBM
applications, like POS outbound dialing applications, to control dialing.
In dial applications, LPDA2 eliminates the need for additional ports and equipment
that had been required to support external 801 auto-dialing equipment in IBM
environments.
About the Modem 1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In leased line operation, while connected on the dial line, the modem can monitor for
LPDA2 commands in the data stream. If the local modem detects an LPDA2
command, the frame that is being processed is aborted. This prevents the remote
DTE from processing the command frame as valid data.
Refer to Chapter 3, Automatic Calling Interfaces, in the 326X Series Modem
Reference Guide, for details.
Managing a Modem
Integral Network Management by Telenetics’ 9110, 9000-UX, and 9000-PC
Network Management Systems (NMS) is standard. The NMS can configure,
monitor, and control local and remote modem operation.
An NMS continuously polls modems to collect management information and check
status. Network management traffic, including alarms, commands, events, and
polling, is transported to remote modems on an in-band channel that does not disrupt
user data traffic nor consume user bandwidth. The modem supports a daisy-chain
network management interface, reducing the hardware required for connections.
modem for use with Telenetics’ Network Management Systems.
Restoring Data Transmission
For critical leased line applications that require backup, you can use Models 3261,
3263, 3266, or 3268 in a point-to-point configuration. If the leased line fails, these
modems can automatically reroute data traffic through the public switched telephone
network (PSTN) over a 2-wire dial line. This integral dial line restoral feature
guarantees that data will keep flowing, minimizing network downtime.
ITU-T V.34 Compliant Modulation Mode
326XFAST and 326XFAST-SDC modems support the ITU-T V.34 compliant
modulation mode. 326XFAST- SDC modems offer the same broad set of features
available in the 326XFAST modems, and let you take advantage of faster
transmission speeds while providing highly reliable data transmission in full-duplex
synchronous environments.
326XFAST modems have a line probing feature that optimizes performance on every
connection by automatically choosing the optimum bandwidth, carrier frequency,
and data rate.
1-6 About the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
V.34 Modulation Mode Characteristics
V.34 modulation mode characteristics are as follows.
Data Rate: 2.4, 4.8, 7.2, 9.6, 12.0, 14.4, 16.8, 19.2, 21.6, 24.0, 26.4, 28.8, 31.2, and
33.6 kbps
Baud Rate: 2400, 2743, 3000, 3200, and 3429. Some baud rates do not support all
data rates.
Carrier Frequency: 1600, 1646, 1800, 1829, 1920, 1959, and 2000 Hz. Some baud
rates do not support all carrier frequencies.
Modulation: V.34 is a four-dimensional trellis-coded modulation standard that uses
precoding and pre-emphasis equalization schemes.
Compatibility in V.34 Modulation Mode
326XFAST Series Modems (operating in V.34 Auto modulation mode), are
compatible with modems that do not support theV.34 modulation mode, by
automatically negotiating the highest common modulation mode (e.g., V.32bis).
V.90 Compatibility: Release 8.1 software enables 326X modems to operate with
V.90 modems in dial-up connections. With this software, 326X modems can
communicate with V.90 modems and negotiate V.34 rates. The release does not
provide 56kbps rates for 326X modems, nor 326X rates higher than the V.34 33.6
kbps standard. An upgrade to 8.1 is not required for modems used only in leased-line
applications.
Synchronous Data Compression (SDC) Feature
The 326XFAST Series Modem is available in a synchronous data compression
(SDC) model. 326XFAST products offer all the features of the 326XFAST family,
plus synchronous DTE rates at 72.0 kbps or higher.
The 326XFAST-SDC Modem is an ideal alternative to costly digital services.
Whether your application requires dedicated bandwidth, bandwidth on demand,
synchronous dial-up, or dial backup, the 326X-SDC provides optimum throughput
for all HDLC/SDLC-like environments, such as X.25, Systems Networking
Architecture (SNA), Statistical Multiplexer, and Router networks.
The synchronous data compression feature in the 326XFAST-SDC Modem is Tele-
netics’ proprietary technology.
Automode/Multimode Feature
Using Automode/Multimode, the modem can automatically negotiate the highest
common modulation speed (within a modulation mode) with another modem.
About the Modem 1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Configuration
Using the local front panel, an NMS, or local-modem AT ACU, you can configure a
remote modem. You can also read the remote modem's status snapshots and receive
its configuration summary on a front panel or async terminal.
Error Correction and Data Compression
The modem provides error correction and data compression in accordance with
the V.42 and V.42bis ITU-TS recommendation. With V.42, modems automatically
determine whether to use Microcom Networking Protocol (MNP) Level 4 or Link
Access Procedure for Modems (LAPM) for error correction. Depending on the
scheme negotiated, the modem uses MNP Level 5 orV.42bis data compression. The
SDC modem uses LAPM with Telenetics’ proprietary data compression technology.
Security
The modem provides access security at two levels:
• Front panel
• Modem access
Front panel security lets you password-protect a modem from access by other users.
This prevents unauthorized changes from being made to a configuration. Front panel
security does not prevent you from using the modem.
You can also screen incoming calls so that unauthorized users cannot access a
modem. This is accomplished with password and callback functions.
Appendix A explains how to configure security features.
Status Snapshots
The modem’s status snapshot feature lets you view a local or remotely controlled
modem's EIA signals and Telenetics circuit quality monitoring system (CQMS)
parameters, and view a configuration summary.
CQMS parameters continuously estimate major line parameters without disrupting
data traffic. Measurement of such selections as signal-to-noise ratio and receive level
helps you to isolate causes of degraded network performance.
1-8 About the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adaptive Rate System
With the Adaptive Rate System enabled, the 326X Series Modem continuously
optimizes its transmit speed within the V.34, V.32bis, V.32 (coded and uncoded),
and V.22bis modulation modes. By constantly monitoring signal quality, the modem
adapts to the optimum transmission rate allowed by line conditions, ensuring
maximum throughput and efficiency.
Troubleshooting (V.54 andV.22bis Tests)
The modem supports a full range of ITU-TS V.54 and V.22bis compatible tests to
help isolate and correct problems.
lists the supported diagnostic tests, and instructions for initiating and terminating
tests using either the front panel control keys or AT commands.
For details on tests, refer to Chapter 4 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
Country-Specific Information
Telephone company regulations vary by country. Because of this, there are minor
physical or operational differences among 326X Series Modem models.
Appendix C, Country-Specific Information, provides cabling, rear panel layouts,
interface pinouts, and other modem features that are required or restricted by country
regulatory agencies.
NET Compliance
This release of the 326X Series Modem complies with the European
Telecommunication Standards Institute’s (ETSI) Net 20, 21, 22, 23, and 25.
CE Regulatory Marking Directive (93/68/EEC)
This product is CE marked to indicate compliance with the following European
directives:
• 73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive (Safety)
• 89/336/EEX EMC Directive
Compliance with the above directives may only be assured when the equipment is
installed and operated in accordance with the instructions for its use and the purpose
for which it is intended.
Products that do not bear the CE mark are not intended for supply or use in the
European Union.
About the Modem 1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Installing the Modem
Contents
Unpacking the Modem .................................................................................
Connecting the Modem ................................................................................
Cabling the Modem ..................................................................................
After Installing the Modem... .......................................................................
Installing the Modem 2-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This chapter describes how to install and connect a 326X Series Modem. In this
chapter, you:
• Unpack the modem
• Choose an appropriate site to install the modem
• Familiarize yourself with the modem’s rear panel and connectors
• Connect the modem to a PC or other data terminal equipment (DTE)
• Connect the modem to a telephone handset (if appropriate) and to the
dial/leased telephone line jacks
• Attach ferrite cylinders, if necessary
• Connect the modem to a Network Management System (NMS), if appropriate
• Turn on the modem and run the unit’s automatic self-test
IMPORTANT: Telephone company and governmental regulations vary by country.
Your modem’s rear panel layout and cabling may vary from that shown in this guide.
important safety guidelines for connecting the modem in your country; and
regulatory restrictions and requirements.
representative or local distributor for ordering information.
NOTE: If you are installing a 326X Series Modem card, refer to the addendum,
326X Series Modem Cards, shipped with your modem’s backplane.
2-2 Installing the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Unpacking the Modem
The modem is wrapped in reusable shock-absorbent packing material. Save the
carton and packing material for later reuse. Telenetics supplies the items shown in
Figure 2-1 with the modem.
One or Two Modular Audio Cables
(3260, 3265: One; Others, Two)
One Power Cord
One 326X Series Modem
(Standalone Unit Shown)
One User’s Guide
One Reference Card
Figure 2-1. Unpacking the Modem
If the equipment is damaged, contact the shipper. If you have further concerns about
damage or missing parts, contact your nearest Telenetics representative, or:
In the U.S.A.:
Outside the U.S.A.:
Telenetics Customer Support
25111 Arctic Ocean
The nearest Telenetics distributor can be found
by accessing our Web site at:
Lake Forest, CA 92630
http://www.telenetics.com
(949) 455-4000
Installing the Modem 2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Equipment Required
Modem-to-Terminal Cable
Asynchronous or Synchronous
Terminal (DTE)
Personal Computer with Communications
Software Package
In addition to the items supplied with the modem, you may need the following:
• Communications Software Package
Many modem applications are controlled by communications software that
supports serial communications. When connecting a modem to a terminal,
more information.)
• Serial Cable
A shielded, straight-through modem-to-terminal cable, data communications
equipment (DCE) to data terminal equipment (DTE) cable, is required.
The cable must have a 25-pin D male connector and a DTE connector.
For modem-to-modem (or other DCE-DCE connection), use a crossover cable.
The cable must support the modem signaling your application requires. Select a
cable based on your computer and the DTE pin assignments in Appendix B.
Choosing a Site
Where you place the modem can affect its operation. To enhance performance:
• Install the modem in a clean, well-lighted area that is free from temperature
extremes and dust.
• Do not place anything on top of a modem.
• Locate the modem no more than the EIA-recommended distance from a DTE
and within 6 feet (1.83m) of a grounded AC power outlet.
• Do not place anything within 1 inch (2.54 cm) of either side of a modem. Also,
to prevent overheating, do not place a modem on its side.
2-4 Installing the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the Modem
Rear Panel Connectors
The rear of the modem has the following connectors:
• Modular jacks for making:
— DIAL LINE and PHONE connections (3260/3265 Modems) or
— DIAL LINE, PHONE, and LEASE LINE connections (3261/3266
Modems)
• One 6-position Dual Inline Package (DIP) switch. This switch “hard-
configures” some operating functions. When the modem is shipped from the
factory, all switches are in the Off (up) position. DIP switch selections cannot
DIP switch function details.
• Network Control (NC) IN and OUT ports for connecting to Telenetics’
Network Management Systems (NMS)
• A DTE port for connecting to a PC or DTE
• An AC power receptacle to accept an AC line cord
• An AC power switch
326X Series Modem Card backplanes (models 3262, 3263, 3267, and 3268), refer to
the addendum, 326X Series Modem Cards, shipped with your backplane.
DIAL
LINE
PHONE
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Factory Preset 6-Position
DIPs are Off (Up)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 2-2. 3260/3265 Modem Rear Panel Layout
Installing the Modem 2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LEASE
LINE
DIAL
LINE
PHONE
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Factory Preset 6-Position
DIPs are Off (Up)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 2-3. 3261/3266 Modem Rear Panel Layout
Electrical Interfaces—EIA/TIA-232 and ITU-TS V.35
Caution
Ensure that the electrical interfaces of the equipment you connect
to the modem are compatible. Incompatible interfaces may
seriously damage the modem. Telenetics makes no guarantee of the
equipment’s integrity if you do not ensure that compatible
interfaces are used. If your DTE has a different interface, you will
need an external converter cable.
326X Series Modems have an EIA/TIA-232/EIA/TIA-562 electrical interface for
connection to external equipment. For compatibility with DTEs that have a V.35
interface, the V.34-SDC Modem is also available with the optional ITU-TS V.35
Recommendation electrical interface.
The rear-panel DTE port is configured at the factory for either interface. Both
interfaces are not available in a unit. Regardless of the interface, external DTEs are
connected through the modem’s rear-panel DTE port.
NOTE: When operating with the V.35 interface, DIP switch S1 must be set to the off
To purchase a compatible cable, consult Appendi xB.
Operating at V.34 DTE Rates
To operate V.34 or V.34-SDC modems at DTE rates greater than 19.2 kbps, you must
on determining the correct cables to use.
2-6 Installing the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ferrite Cylinders
Ferrite cylinders or beads installed on cables filter out line disturbances. They are
required on some 326X models in some countries, as described in this section.
Caution
Install cables with the ferrite end adjacent to the modem.
The ferrite cylinder ensures that the unit operates in compliance
with FCC RFI requirements.
Models 3261 and 3266 – Dial Line Connections
Two telephone cables with ferrite cylinders are included in the Model 3261
(U.S.A.) and the 3266 (Canada, Germany, U.K., and Japan) accessory kit.
Connect the cables from the modem to 6- or 8-conductor dial-line connections.
the next section, shows how to connect the 3261/3266 modem.
Dial Line Cable
To Wall Jack
Ferrite
Figure 2-4. Attaching Ferrite Cable to the Modem
Models 3267 and 3268
Ferrite cylinders are required on:
• Both dial line cables and on DTE cables on the 3267 V.34 Modem
• Both audio (leased or dial) cables and on DTE cables on the 3268 V.34
Modem
• Power cables on Modular Nest enclosures populated with 3267 and 3268 V.34
Modems
• Network management cables on Modular Nest enclosures populated with
3267 and 3268 V.34 Modems
A cylinder is included with each cable that requires one. Follow the instructions
below to ensure correct cylinder installation.
Installing the Modem 2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on an Audio or Network Management Cable
Do the following for each cable:
2) Set the cable into the cylinder cutouts.
3) Ensure that 1 to 1-1⁄2 inches of the cable protrude from the cylinder (on the
end you insert into the backplane connector).
4) Snap the cylinder closed. You can reopen and close it to reset the cable.
5) Insert the cable into the modem backplane connector (with the ferrite cylinder
close to the backplane connector).
To Line Jack
Audio Cable
Cutout
To Connector On
Modem Rear Panel
Ferrite Cylinder
Cable Looped Twice
Around Cylinder
1"- 11/2 "
Figure 2-5. Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on an Audio Cable
Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on a DTE Cable
Do the following for each DTE cable:
1) Pass the DTE cable through the cylinder.
2) Set the cable into the cylinder cutouts.
3) Position the cylinder as close as possible to the plug you install on the back-
plane connector.
4) Snap the cylinder closed. You can reopen and close it to reset the cable.
5) Insert the cable into the DTE connector on the modem backplane connector,
with the ferrite cylinder close to the backplane connector.
2-8 Installing the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on a Power Cable
Do the following for each power cable of a Modular Nest enclosure populated with
3267 and 3268V.34 Modems .
2) Set the cable into the cylinder cutouts.
3) Ensure that 1 to 1-1/2 inches of the cable protrude from the cylinder (on the
end you insert into the backplane connector).
4) Snap the cylinder closed. You can reopen and close it to reset the cable.
5) Insert the cable into the Modular Nest enclosure connector (with the ferrite
cylinder close to the connector).
To Power Jack
Power Cable
Cutout
Ferrite Cylinder
Cable Looped Once
Around Cylinder
1
1"- 1
"
/
2
To Modular Nest Enclosure Connector
Figure 2-6. Installing a Ferrite Cylinder on a Power Cable
Installing the Modem 2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Important Information About the Modular Nest Enclosure Front Door
Warning
For safety, the enclosure front door should remain closed and locked
at all times unless you are installing, removing, or configuring
product cards.
Avertissement
Pour des raisons de sécurité, la porte d’entrée doit être toujours
fermée et verrouillée, sauf lorsque vous installez, retirez ou
configurez des cartes.
Warnung
Aus Sicherheitsgründen darf die Klappe auf der Vorderseite nur zum
Installieren, Entfernen oder Konfigurieren von Produktkarten
entriegelt und geöffnet werden.
Por razones de seguridad, la puerta frontal deberá permanecer
cerrada en todo momento, a menos que se proceda a la instalación,
extracción o configuración de las tarjetas del producto.
Important Information About the Modular Nest Enclosure
This notice applies to cooling airflow around the Modular Nest unit.
Caution
Failure to properly arrange cables could impede cooling airflow,
possibly resulting in damage to the equipment
Mise en Garde
Un mauvais agencement des câbles risque d’empêcher une bonne
ventilation et par conséquent de causer des dommages matériels.
Vorsicht
Die inkorrekte Anordnung von Kabeln kann den Kühlluftstrom
behindern und zu Geräteschäden führen.
!
Precaucion!
La disposición defectuosa de los cables puede impedir el flujo de
aire frío, resultando en posibles daños para el equipo.
2-10 Installing the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cabling the Modem
This section explains how to connect the modem to:
1) A PC or DTE (asynchronous or synchronous terminal)
2) A dial telephone line
3) A telephone cable (between handset and modem)
4) A leased telephone line (if appropriate)
5) The power cord
6) Network management system cables (if appropriate)
Warning
The modem must be grounded through its electrical plug. If you
cannot use the safety plug with your electrical outlet, consult a
licensed electrician to ensure that the modem is properly grounded.
Unplug the modem from the power outlet before having it serviced.
Avertissement
Le modem doit être mis à la terre lors de son branchement. Si vous
n'avez pas de cartouche fusible, consultez un électricien pour assurer
la mise à terre adéquate de votre appareil. Mettez-le hors tension
avant de commencer toute réparation.
Warnung
Das Modem wird normalerweise über den Stecker geerdet. Wenn
Sie den Schuko-Stecker nicht an die Steckdose anschließen können,
wenden Sie sich an einen zugelassenen Elektriker, um
sicherzustellen, daß das Gerät korrekt geerdet ist. Trennen Sie das
Gerät vor dem Öffnen des Gehäuses vom Netz.
Installing the Modem 2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1
EIA/TIA 232-D
Interface Cable
Step 1: Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter.
2
Step 2: Install an EIA/TIA 232-D cable between the modem's DTE connector and the
Telephone
Cable
DTE or PC serial port. Tighten the cable-connector retaining screws.
Dial/
Leased
Line
Step 3: Unplug the telephone cord from the wall jack and plug it into the modem’s
PHONE LINE connector
Dial/
Jack
Leased
Step 4: Attach the modular audio cable (provided with the modem) to the modem’s DIAL
Telephone
Line
LINE connector. Connect the cable to the RJ-11 dial line wall jack.
Step 5: Plug the power cable into the modem, and then plug into an outlet.
3
IMPORTANT: Transmit levels on a leased line are typically much greater than those on
a dial line. Do not connect a modem to the dial network when the modem is
configured for leased line operation; the telephone company may detect a fault
condition and initiate an incorrect service call.
4
AC
Outlet
Power
Cord
Figure 2-7. 3260/3265 Modem Cabling
1
EIA/TIA 232-D
Interface Cable
2
Step 1: Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter.
Telephone
Cable
Dial
Line
Jack
Dial
Telephone
Line
Step 2: Install an EIA/TIA 232-D cable between the modem's DTE connector and the DTE
or PC's serial port. Tighten the cable-connector retaining screws.
Leased
Line
Step 3: Unplug the telephone cord from the wall jack and plug it into the modem’s PHONE
Jack
LINE connector.
Step 4: Attach the modular audio cable (provided with the modem) to the modem’s DIAL
4
3
LINE connector. Connect the cable to the RJ-11 dial line wall jack.
Leased
Telephone
Line
Step 5: Attach another modular audio cable (provided with the modem) to the modem’s
LEASE LINE connector. Connect the cable to the leased line wall jack.
IMPORTANT: Transmit levels on a leased line are typically much greater than those on a
dial line. Do not connect a modem to the dial network when the modem is config-
ured for leased line operation; the telephone company may detect a fault condition
and initiate an incorrect service call.
5
Power
Cord
AC
Outlet
Step 6: Plug the power cable into the modem, and then into an outlet.
Figure 2-8. 3261/3266 Modem Cabling
2-12 Installing the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Connecting the Modem to a Network Management System
326X Series Modems can be connected to the following Telenetics systems:
Use the modem’s NC IN and NC OUT 8-pin DIN connectors for NMS connections.
1
326X Series Modem
3
9110 Terminal
2
Step 1: Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter.
Step 2: Attach an 8-pin DIN adapter cable connector to the modem’s NC IN connector.
NOTE: The modem can be connected to either a 9- or 25-pin serial communication port on the rear of
the 9110 DMS. Figure 2-7 shows a 25-pin port connection.
Step 3: Attach the other end of the 8-pin DIN adapter cable to the DB 25-pin connector on the 9110’s
network control 9- or 25-pin adapter cable.
Step 4: Attach the 25- or 9-pin connector to the appropriate port on the rear of the 9110 DMS.
Figure 2-9. Connecting to a 9110 NMS
1
326X Series Modem
2
Junction Box
3
To Proxy Agent (PC), and then
to 9000-PC or 9000-UX
Step 1: Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter.
Step 2: Attach an 8-pin DIN adapter cable connector to the modem’s NC IN connector.
Step 3: Connect the 8-pin control-channel connector on the other end of the 8-pin DIN adapter cable
into its receptacle on a junction box.
Step 4: Attach the 50-pin connector on the network control cable to the junction box. Connect the
other end to the appropriate Digi-Board on the rear of the NMS Proxy Agent PC.
Figure 2-10. Connecting to a 9000-PC or 9000-UX NMS
Installing the Modem 2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 1: Install ferrite cylinders as explained in this chapter.
Step 2: Attach an 8-pin DIN adapter cable connector to the
modem’s NC IN connector.
(The 8-pin control channel connector at the other end of
this cable is connected to a junction box, as shown in
Figure 2-8.)
Step 3: Connect an 8-pin DIN cable from the first NC OUT
326X Series Modem
connector to the next NC IN connector, and so on.
To Junction Box
and NMS
326X Series Modem
326X Series Modem
Figure 2-11. Connecting Modems in a Daisy Chain Configuration
To attach modem enclosure cards to an NMS, refer to the addendum, 326X Series
Modem Cards, shipped with the modem backplane.
Turning on the Modem
The power cable connects the rear of the modem to a standard 115V outlet. After
making other connections, plug the power cable into the modem, and then plug it
into an outlet. Turn the rear panel power switch to the On (up) position.
When powered on, the modem automatically performs a self-test of internal circuits.
displays that can follow it.
2-14 Installing the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Self-Test
When you apply power to the modem, it automatically runs a self-test that checks for
and identifies faults in the modem’s circuits. After displaying the message SELF-
Table 2-1.
Self-Test Messages
This Message...
326X Initial
Indicates:
The modem is set to operate using factory default values.
326X Ready
No faults were encountered during the self-test. The modem is ready
for operation.
[Error message]
A system fault was detected during the self-test.
Handling Error Messages
If the modem fails the self-test and displays an error message, do the following:
1) Record the message to assist in troubleshooting the modem.
2) Turn the modem off and then on again, and observe the front panel display.
If the modem displays 326X READY, the earlier error message was probably
caused by a temporary power line problem. Some line problems do not affect
modem operation. If the modem continues to display an error message, contact
Telenetics Customer Support or an authorized Telenetics distributor.
After Installing the Modem...
the modem.
Installing the Modem 2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This chapter has three parts:
• System Requirements for Software Upgrades
• Configuring and Operating the Modem
• Other Call Establishment Methods
System Requirements for Software Upgrades
This section explains the prerequisites for an upgrade to 7.9 software. This section
does not apply to new units with 7.8 or higher software installed.
A modem can be upgraded to Release 7.9 software only if it has Release 7.0, 7.5, 7.6,
or 7.7 software.
Configuring and Operating the Modem
You can configure and operate the modem in several ways:
• From the modem front panel
• From a Network Management System (NMS)
• From the modem AT Automatic Calling Unit (ACU), if it is attached to an
asynchronous “dumb” terminal—a terminal without software—or to a PC
running an asynchronous communications software package
Each of these is described in the sections that follow.
If You Are Unsure of Your DTE’s Data Format...
The DTE manual should tell you what data format—asynchronous or synchronous—
it uses. Most PC applications use an asynchronous data format.
Using the Front Panel
You can configure and operate all modem functions using the front panel’s:
• Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
• Liquid crystal display (LCD)
• Configuration menus
• Control keys
enclosure card front panel. Note the LCD, LEDs, and control keys.
NOTE: Information specific to enclosure card modems is covered in the addendum,
326X Series Modem Cards, shipped with the modem backplane.
3-2 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IMPORTANT: To use the front panel keys, the modem must be connected to an AC
power source, the rear panel power switch must be turned on, and rear panel DIP
104
RD
108
TR
125
RI/OH
Six front-panel LEDs
indicate status
3260
TD
103
CD
109
RC/NC
Figure 3-1. Standalone 3260 Modem with Front Cover Closed
LCD Display
326x Ready
Control Keys
RD
104
TR
108
RI/OH
125
RETURN
ENTER
103
TD
109
CD
RC/NC
Figure 3-2. Standalone 3260 Modem with Front Cover Open
Enclosure Card has eight LEDs
326x Ready
RETURN DOWN ACROSS ENTER
Figure 3-3. 3260 Modem Enclosure Card Front Panel
LEDs show the status of key DTE interface signals. If a communication problem
Table 3-1.
326X LEDs
LED
Name
Description
TD
Transmit Data
Flashes when the modem accepts data from the local DTE, to
transmit.
RD
Receive Data
Flashes when the modem passes received data to the local
DTE.
RI/OH Ring Indicator/
Off-Hook
On when an incoming call is ringing, and when the modem is
off-hook and connected to the dial line.
Getting Started 3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 3-1.
326X LEDs
LED
Name
Description
CD
Data Carrier
Detect
On when the local modem receives a carrier signal (as defined
by the current modulation mode) from the remote modem or
when the DCD parameter=High.
TR
Data Terminal
Ready
On when a DTR signal from a terminal is detected.
RC/NC Remote Control/ Flashes to indicate that the modem is under remote
Network Control configuration (via front panel or AT ACU).
On when the modem is under NMS control.
A/B
A or B
Alarm
Enclosure cards only.
On when modem A front panel information is displayed.
Off when modem B front panel information is displayed.
To toggle between modem A and modem B front panels, hold
and then press
.
ALM
Enclosure cards only.
On when a test is in progress or a modem failure occurs. With
the 3262/3267 Modem card, if one modem fails, the ALM
LED lights and remains lit regardless of which modem front
panel is being viewed.
Front Panel Display
• Configure the modem
• Store and view telephone numbers
• Initiate and answer calls
• View status information
• Run online tests
• Enter passwords and network addresses
3-4 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigating the Configuration Menu Tree
This section describes the modem menu tree structure. It explains how to access
parameters using the front panel control keys.
Menu Structure
The menu structure consists of fifteen categories, which appear in capital letters.
Example: CONFIGURATION OPT’S.
Each category has parameters (example: Mode). Some parameters are
configurable; others indicate modem and call status. Most parameters have selectable
options. Options affect the modem’s operating characteristics.
You can view parameters and options in the front panel LCD display. If options can
be set, the following indicators display:
• An equals sign (=) indicates the currently selected option of the parameter
• A colon (:) indicates that the displayed option is available but is not selected
Each parameter has a default option:
• Some defaults are determined by the assigned factory-preset option sets
(preconfigured option sets). These defaults are exclusive to an option set.
• Other factory options are not exclusive to an option set and they always have
the same default setting, regardless of which factory-preset option set you use.
tree structure, including the available and default options.
Setting Configuration Options from the Front Panel
Table 3-2 describes control key functions.
Table 3-2.
Front Panel Keys
Keys
Function
Steps up through the menu tree from a parameter to a category, or from a
category to the default display. Example: from Test=, pressing
displays the
Return
TEST OPTS category. Pressing
DATA 9600 T/D?
again displays the default display, such as,
Steps through the parameters in a menu category.
Across
NOTES:
1) If you hold the
2) With the 3262/3267 Modems, to toggle between modem A and modem B front
panels, hold while pressing
or
key down, it repeats until you stop pressing.
.
Getting Started 3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 3-2.
Front Panel Keys
Keys
Function
Steps through categories (example: Data 9600 T/D?, TEST OPTS,
MODULATION OPT’S), or, at a parameter within a category, scrolls through
the options.
Down
Selects an option and/or initiates an action. This key also serves as a Talk/Data
“softkey,” allowing you to toggle between using a telephone and the modem to
establish a telephone connection.
Enter
NOTES:
1) If you hold the
2) With the 3262/3267 Modems, to toggle between modem A and modem B front
panels, hold while pressing
or
key down, it repeats until you stop pressing.
.
Example: Accessing a Configuration Option
DATA 9600 T/D?
Select Options
To select a predefined configuration option set:
1) From the Data 9600 T/D? display, press
until Select Options=1 displays.
2) Press
to display Select Options:2, Select Options:3, or Select Options:4.
3) Press
to select an option. The modem is now configured for the option.
Status Displays
The Data 9600 T/D? category is the default display when the modem is powered-up
or after the modem has “timed-out” (i.e., the front panel control keys have not been
used for at least five minutes). The data rate (9600, in the display Data 9600 T/D?) is
the current DCE (modem-to-modem) data rate. It varies with the speed at which the
modems connect. The Data 9600 T/D? category serves three primary functions:
• Talk/Data” Switch
• Operating Status Displays
• Option Sets/Dialing Options
Talk/Data Switch
Pressing
when Data 9600 T/D? is displayed toggles the modem between using:
• An external telephone to manually dial a telephone call
• The modem to dial a stored or unstored telephone number
3-6 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Status Displays
The DTE19.2 RELIABL and Phase Jitter subcategories let you view modem
operating status. Example: in the DTE 19.2 RELIABL subcategory, pressing
displays:
• Operating status messages
• DTE/DCE rate/status
• Error correction/data compression status
• EIA/TIA signal status
• Disconnect reasons
• The modem’s software revision level
• Circuit Quality Monitoring System (CQMS) parameter status
Commands, of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
Option Sets/Dialing Options
These status subcategories let you choose a preconfigured option set, and make other
selections to determine how the modem will establish telephone connections.
For details on configuring option sets and other call establishment options in this
Where Do I Go from Here?
When you are familiar with the front panel, configuration menu system, and control
keys, refer to the following:
?
number. The Reference Card shows the complete menu structure.
Using the Modem with a Network Management System
(NMS)
Modem functions can be configured and controlled from an NMS. Refer to:
• The network management system documentation
• The 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for detailed descriptions of
parameter options and features
Getting Started 3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the AT Automatic Calling Unit (ACU)
To connect the modem to an asynchronous terminal—a terminal without
software—or a PC running an asynchronous communications software package,
you use the modem’sAT Automatic Calling Unit (ACU) interface.
ATZ4
The AT ACU is compatible with:
• The industry-standard AT command set (AT and AT& commands)
• The Telenetics enhanced AT command set (AT commands)
*
AT commands define how the modem is configured, how it makes calls, and what
test operations it performs. The AT command set lets you configure and operate
modem options and features from the PC or asynchronous terminal keyboard.
Using the Modem with an Async Terminal
If you are connecting the modem to an asynchronous terminal, you can use the AT
ACU to configure parameter options from the keyboard. Learn the AT command syn-
tax in order to generate the appropriateAT commands.
Where Do I Go from Here?
To continue configuring the modem from an asynchronous terminal, refer to:
?
complete menu structure.
(The modem also supports an ITU-TS V.25bis ACU for initiating calls from an
asynchronous or synchronous DTE, described later in this chapter.)
3-8 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Modem with a PC and Async Communications
Software
When using the modem with a PC, you need communications or terminal emulation
software. Communications software acts as an interface—with pull-down menus or
graphics—between your PC and modem, allowing you to perform modem operations
from your PC.
It is unlikely that you will use AT commands directly to configure and test the
modem. Some communications software, however, may not support all of the
modem’s configuration options or may require you to issue commands to the modem
directly.
Communications software packages that directly support the modem (where
Telenetics 3260 Modem, Codex 3260 Modem, or Motorola 3260 Modem is a
selection within the package) support the industry standard commands (AT, AT&)
and the Telenetics-enhanced commands (AT ), making more knowledge of AT
*
command syntax unnecessary.
Communications software packages that offer a Hayes-Compatible selection do not
support Telenetics-enhanced commands: (AT ). In this case, you may enter AT
commands yourself, if required by your application.
*
*
Where Do I Go from Here?
If your communications software package supports a 3260 Modem (or a comparable
3260 selection), refer to:
?
complete menu structure.
If your package does not support all of the modem’s configuration options, or
requires you to issue AT commands to the modem directly, refer to:
• Communications software documentation.
If your package supports a Hayes-Compatible selection, refer to:
• For AT configuration settings, refer to:
*
the complete menu structure.
Getting Started 3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Other Call Establishment Methods
In addition to the configuration and operation methods in this chapter, the modem
supports other methods to establish and manage telephone connections:
3
6
9
#
1
4
7
2
5
8
0
• V. 2 5 b i s AC U (for synchronous or asynchronous applications)
• NetView LPDA-2 ACU (for synchronous applications)
• IBM AS 400 (for synchronous dialing)
• External Auto-Call Units such as the Bell 801C
These methods are described in the sections that follow.
V.25bis ACU for Sync or Async Applications
The modem supports an ITU-TS V.25bis ACU for initiating calls from an intelligent
terminal, in synchronous or asynchronous formats, which supports:
• Addressed mode, to perform call-related tasks, such as storing phone numbers
in memory, dialing calls from memory, connecting/disregarding incoming calls
• Manual and direct call establishment methods. Direct mode lets you use DTR
transitions from the DTE to establish calls. Manual mode lets you manually
initiate and answer calls with a telephone and then transfer the call to the
modem.
Where Do I Go from Here?
For more information on the V.25bis ACU, refer to Chapter 3, Automatic Calling
Interfaces, in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide. Programmers and System
Developers should also refer to Chapter 3 for a programming guide describing
asynchronous and synchronous data formats using the ASCII/EBCDIC character
sets.
?
?
NetView LPDA-2 ACU for Sync Applications
The modem supports Link Problem Determination Aid (LPDA-2). LPDA-2 is the
communications protocol between IBM host software and transmission devices for
exchanging diagnostic and control information. LPDA-2 commands provide a means
for an attached terminal to command the modem to dial a telephone number and
report back if the call is successful or not successful.
Where Do I Go from Here?
For more information on using the LPDA-2 ACU, refer to Chapter 3, Automatic
Calling Interfaces, in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for configuration
information and for information on NetView’s LPDA-2 dialing commands.
3-10 Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sync Dialing from an IBM AS 400
The modem can be configured to operate as a synchronous originate modem
with the IBM AS 400. The AS 400 supports switched operation with call
origination via a V.25bis-compliant call establishment driver. In this type of
application, the modem is driven by the APPC/APPN bit-synchronous protocol.
Where Do I Go from Here?
For more information on using the modem with an IBM AS 400, refer to:
?
?
• Chapter 3, Automatic Calling Interfaces, in the 326X Series Modem
Reference Guide for details on bit-synchronous protocol frame formats and the
V.25bis protocol.
External Auto-Call Units
The modem can be used with applications that support external dialers, such as
the Bell 801C. Once an external dialer establishes a call, it passes control of the
dial line to the modem by the MI/MIC control leads on the DIAL LINE
connector. NOTE: This type of application is supported in Canada and the
U.S.A. only.
Where Do I Go from Here?
For more information on external call units, refer to Chapter 3, Automatic
Calling Interfaces, in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
Getting Started 3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Configuring the Modem
Contents
Configuring the Modem for Use with Communications
Operating Notes .......................................................................................
What is an Option Set? .............................................................................
Option Set 4—Async Answering Central Site
4-16
Option Set 4—Synchronous Leased Line Applications
Remote Access Reset ...................................................................................
4-21
Configuring the Modem 4-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview
This chapter explains how to configure the modem, in conjunction with Chapter 3,
• If the application requires a communications software package, read the
• If you have previously installed the 326X in another application, the section
can be installed in a new application.
• To configure quickly, the 326X Series Modem offers four preconfigured
option sets. Each option set is tailored for an application and stored in the
to determine if an option set is appropriate for your application.
• The following two sections provide examples of common 326X applications
and tell you how to configure the modem for each application. These
sections will help you to configure the modem quickly.
• If you are unfamiliar with the AT command set or the modem front panel,
done, you can use a remote modem to configure the local modem.
If the modem is part of a network and you have a Network Management System
(NMS) installed, consult your network manager for configuration information.
Communications Software Package Operating Notes
This section provides information for configuring the 326X Series Modem to work
with communications software packages.
Configuring the Modem for Use with Communications
Software
Select the Modem’s Preconfigured Option Set 1
Option Set 1 (the modem’s factory default setting) is for use with communications
software in asynchronous dial applications, where the AT ACU originates calls.
Refer also to:
4-2 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What to Select in the Communications Software Package’s Modem Menu List
1) Select Telenetics 3260 Modem, Codex 3260 Modem, Motorola 3260
Modem, or another 3260 option from the package’s modem list. Packages that
directly support the 326X Series Modem support industry-standard commands
and Telenetics-enhanced commands, making further configuration unneces-
sary.
2) If a 3260 option does not appear in the list, contact the software manufacturer
for the latest version of the package (which should have such an option).
3) Select a Hayes-Compatible entry. With this option, Telenetics-enhanced
commands (AT ) are not supported.
*
4) Try operating the communications software. If you have problems, refer to the
Operating Notes
Keep the following in mind when using the modem with communications software.
General Notes
The information in this section applies to all 326X Series Modem platforms.
Selecting an Option Set
Option Set 1 was designed for use with asynchronous communications software
packages. It is compatible with most communications software. Option Sets 2, 3, and
4 are intended for different applications and have different default settings. Select
Option Set 1 when using a communications software package.
Establishing a Connection with Option Set 1
With Option Set 1, the modem operates as follows:
1) The modem attempts to establish a LAPM connection.
2) If the connection is unsuccessful, the modem attempts to establish an MNP
connection.
3) If the previous connections are unsuccessful, the modem attempts a Normal
mode connection to the remote modem. All data that is sent to the modem’s
attached computer terminal before the modem establishes a connection is lost.
Auto Dialing and Answering in Option Set 1
When the modem is configured for Option Set 1, and the communications software
package executes an auto dialing and answering operation, the modem automatically
adjusts its baud rate to the communications software baud rate and parity. This rate
remains constant during the established connection.
Configuring the Modem 4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Direct Operating Mode
If you select Mode=Direct (EC/DC OPT’S category):
• Speed conversion and flow control are not supported. If the communications
package does not support speed detect, change the 326X’s modulation mode to
Auto V.32, and after a connection is established, change the communications
software rate to match the modem’s connection rate.
• If the communications package supports data rates higher than 9.6 kbps, set the
modem’s maximum rate (Max Rate, AT MX) to the higher rate and disable
*
the adaptive rate feature before placing or answering calls. Ensure that the
package’s speed and the modem’s connection rate match when the connection
is established. NOTE: Some communications software packages support the
automatic speed detect feature, which automatically matches the modem’s baud
rate with the software package’s baud rate.
Transferring a File
Refer to the communications package instructions for the procedure for transferring
files using the communications software package’s supported protocols.
Ring Messages
Some communications packages wait for ring messages to be received before the
modem answers incoming calls. The 326X Series Modem must be set to the
communications software package’s baud rate before the package recognizes the ring
message. Set DTE Rate, by the front panel or by issuing an AT command, when the
modem is configured for autobaud operations.
Flow Control Requirements
• Flow control prevents buffer overflow when line disturbances cause frequent
retransmissions. See “AT FL” (for the DTE) and “AT MF” (for the modem)
*
*
If the communications package does not directly support the 326X Series
Modem and you want to use the package’s file transfer method:
• If the communications package supportsRTS/CTS flow control, enable it:
a) Set the modem to Flow=RTS/CTS
b) Set Modem Flow=Off
c) Transfer data, using the instructions in the communications package.
• If the communications package does not support RTS/CTS flow control:
a) Set the modem to Flow=Off
b) Set Modem Flow=Off
c) Transfer data, using the instructions in the communications package.
• If the communications package supports the automatic speed detect
feature, set Max Rate to a value also supported by the software package.
Set Speed Conver=Off. Set the modem’s adaptive rate parameter to Off.
4-4 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326XFAST V.34 and 326XFAST-SDC Notes
The information in this section applies when operating at the higher DTE rates
available with the 326XFAST V.34 and 326XFAST-SDC Series Modems.
• If the communications software package supports the higher terminal rates
available with these modems, and you want to use the package’s auto dial or
auto answer features, set the modem’s DTE Rate (TERMINAL OPT’S
category) to that of the package.
• Some communications packages do not let you select the higher rates available
with the 326XFAST V. 3 4 modem while using the package’s auto dial or auto
answer functions.To take advantage of the higher DTE rates, do the following:
a) Set the package for Direct or Terminal mode.
b) Select the higher speed of the package.
c) Set the modem’s DTE Rate to match the package’s set speed.
d) Use the AT command set to establish the connection.
• Some file transfer protocols offered by a communications package may not
operate properly when DTE Rate is greater than 38.4 kbps, because some
serial ports cannot sustain data transmission at these rates.
If the Communications Software and Modem Do Not
Operate...
If, after following the suggestions in this section, you cannot get the communications
software package and modem to operate, refer to Chapter 6, Troubleshooting Guide.
If you still cannot get the communications software package and modem to operate,
contact your software vendor for assistance.
Preparing for Operation
The procedures in this chapter assume that you are installing the modem for the first
time. If you want to reinstall the modem, perform the procedure(s) below to
reinitialize the modem’s memory. NOTE: Reinitializing modem memory sets
modem parameter options back to factory defaults (Option Set 1) and deletes stored
telephone numbers from memory.
Reinitializing Memory from the Front Panel
1) Press
2) Press . The modem displays Reinit Mem?
3) Press to reinitialize modem memory.
twice. Press
until the modem displays Reinit Memory.
Reinitializing Memory Using the AT&F Command
You can also reinitialize memory by entering AT&F<CR> from the terminal.
Configuring the Modem 4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Option Sets
This section discusses the modem’s preconfigured option sets, in three parts:
• What is an Option Set?
• How to Configure an Option Set
• Option Set Defaults—326X V.32bis, 326XFAST V.34, and 326XFAST-SDC
What is an Option Set?
Option sets are complete configurations, each tailored for an application and stored
in memory. Option sets get the modem working quickly.
If an option set does not exactly suit your needs, pick the one that most closely
matches your application, modify its settings, and save the changes in the modem’s
Table 4-1.
Option Set Summary—326X V.32bis and V.34 Modems
Option
Set
Application
Async dial applications in which you are using the AT ACU to originate calls to
a central site (default option set)
1
Sync central site auto-answer applications; no ACU
2
3
4
4
Sync calls to a central site
Async central site auto-answer applications; no ACU (Models 3260/62/65/67)
Leased line application with dial restoral; no ACU (Models 3261/63/66/68)
Table 4-2.
Option Set Summary—326XFAST-SDC Modem
Option
Set
Application
Async dial applications in which you are using the AT ACU to originate calls to
a central site (default option set)
1
Sync dial A/B restoral application
Sync dial only application
2
3
Sync leased line application with dial restoral; no ACU (Models 3261/63/66/68) 4
4-6 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option Set Descriptions—326X V.32bis and V.34 Modems
Option Set 1—Async Calls to Central Site Using the AT ACU
With Option Set 1, the modem communicates over dial lines using an asynchronous
data format. This option set is appropriate for home or office use where you plan to
dial, for example, into a central-site computer, minicomputer, an electronic bulletin
board, or a personal computer. When you first install the modem, it is set to power up
with Option Set 1 as the factory default. The modem recognizes the standard AT
Command Set and the Telenetics-enhanced AT Command set.
To satisfy common asynchronous communications software packages, Option Set 1
4-2). The modem originates calls and answers incoming calls according to the setting
At the beginning of each connection, the modem negotiates the highest common data
rate with the remote modem set to its factory default setting or automode. The
modem also uses the adaptive rate feature in theV.34, V.32bis, orV.32 modulation
modes. This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor.
Option Set 2—Sync Answering Central Site Without an ACU
Option Set 2 satisfies the needs of a synchronous application where most calls are to
Because calls are received primarily at the central site, the modem is set to answer
calls automatically. With DTR=108.2, the local DTE can control the DTR signal.
This allows the local DTE to use DTR transitions to connect the modem to the
central site at the beginning of transmission and disconnect it when transmission
ends.
At the beginning of each connection, the modem negotiates the highest common data
rate with the remote modem. The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V.34,
V.32bis, or V.32 modulation modes. This ensures maximum throughput when line
quality is poor.
Option Set 3—Sync Calls to Central Site Using the V.25bis ACU
Option Set 3 satisfies the needs of a synchronous application, where the remote
With Option Set 3, the modem originates calls with its V.25bis ACU. The DTR
option is set to 108.2 so that the V.25bis ACU can manipulate the DTR signal. All
other options in the ACU OPT’S category are set for a typical synchronous DTE.
At the beginning of each connection, the modem negotiates the highest common data
rate with the remote modem. The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V.34,
V.32bis, or V.32 modulation modes. This ensures maximum throughput when line
quality is poor.
Configuring the Modem 4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option Set 4—Async Answering Central Site Without an ACU (Models 3260/
62/65/67)
Option Set 4 satisfies the needs of an asynchronous application where most calls are
Because calls are received primarily at the central site, the modem is set to answer
calls automatically. With DTR=Discon, the local DTE can control the DTR signal.
This allows the local DTE to use DTR transitions to connect the modem to the
central site at the beginning of transmission and disconnect it when transmission
ends. The DTR signal from the DTE must be high for the modem to auto-answer. If
the DTR signal is low, it does not answer incoming calls.
At the beginning of each connection, the modem negotiates the highest common data
rate with the remote modem. The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in the V.34,
V.32bis, or V.32 modulation modes. This ensures maximum throughput when line
quality is poor.
Option Set 4—Sync Leased Line Applications With Dial Restoral (Models
3261/63/66/68)
Option Set 4 uses the modem’s leased line restoral feature. With this option set, the
modem operates primarily on a leased line unless that line fails. If so, the modem
automatically restores the connection over a single dial line. You must install a 326X
Series Modem at both ends of the leased line to implement restoral operation.
The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV.34 orV.32bis Auto modes. This
ensures maximum throughput when line quality deteriorates. Ifrestoral criteria are
met, the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the public switched
telephone network (PSTN) over a single dial line. At that time, the modem attempts
to run at its maximum rate over the dial line, and falls back to lower speeds if
required. After an hour, the modem returns to the leased line.
If you operate your modems in leased-line mode with Option Set 4, and one modem
has software Revision 7.8 or 7.9, set the Fast Call parameter (AT FC, Modulation
*
Opts Menu) to Off in both modems.
Option Set Descriptions—326XFAST-SDC Modems
Option Set 1—Async Calls to Central Site
Option Set 1 in the 326X-SDC product functions the same as Option Set 1 above.
Option Set 2—Sync Dial A/B Restoral
Option Set 2 satisfies the needs of a synchronous point-to-point digital link restoral
application (see Table 4-2).
With this option set, the Clock is set to External as network timing is provided by the
DSU/CSU. NOTE: With this option set, (for Telenetics and Motorola DSU/CSUs as
well as non-Telenetics and non-Motorola DSU/CSUs), the DSU’s restoral configura-
tion should be set to Timing=Internal.
4-8 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
With this option set, the local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation.
The modems default to Fast Call=Lvl3, and use LAPM error correction with
modified V.42bis data compression. Enable Option Set 2 in both the local and remote
modems, and ensure that Mode (AT SM) is set the same in both modems.
*
The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV.34 Auto modulation mode. This
ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor.
Option Set 3—Sync Dial Only
With Option Set 3, the modem provides the network timing (Clock=Internal).
Select a data rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE, using DTE Rate
*
With this option set, the local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation.
The modems default to Fast Call=Lvl3, and use LAPM error correction with a
modified V.42bis data compression. Enable Option Set 3 in both the local and remote
modems, and ensure that Mode (AT SM) is set the same in both modems.
*
With Option Set 3, DTR=108.1 so that an off-to-on DTR transition instructs the
modem to connect to the telephone line. If the modem detects an incoming call, the
call is connected. If the modem does not detect an incoming call and Default Dial
(AT DA) is enabled, the modem dials the number specified. If Default Dial is
*
disabled, the modem refers to the Modulation Mode option (AT MM). If set to
*
Answer, the modem goes off-hook and sends an answer-back tone. An on-to-off
DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line. If DTR is low, the
modem does not auto-answer. DTR transitions govern how the modem answers and
disconnects calls. All options in the ACU OPT’S category are set for a typical
synchronous DTE.
The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV.34 Auto modulation mode. This
ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor.
Option Set 4—Sync Leased Line with Dial Restoral; No ACU
(Models 3261/63/66/68)
Option Set 4 uses the modem’s leased line restoral feature. With this option set, the
modem operates primarily on a leased line unless that line fails. If so, the modem
automatically restores the connection over a single dial line.You must install a
326XFAST-SDC Modem at both ends of the leased line to implement restoral.
The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV.34 Auto modulation mode. This
setting ensures maximum throughput when line quality deteriorates. If restoral
criteria are met, the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the public
switched telephone network (PSTN) over a single dial line. At that time, the modem
attempts to run at 28.8 kbps over the dial line, and falls back to lower speeds if
required. After an hour, the modem returns to the leased line.
With Option Set 4, the modem provides the network timing (Clock=Internal).
Select a data rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE, using DTE Rate
*
Configuring the Modem 4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In this option set, the local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation.
The modems default to Fast Call=Lvl3, and use LAPM error correction with
modified V.42bis data compression. Enable Option Set 4 in both the local and remote
modems, and ensure that Mode (AT SM) is set the same in both modems.
*
If you operate your modems in leased-line mode with Option Set 4, and one modem
has software Revision 7.8 or 7.9, set the Fast Call parameter (AT FC, Modulation
*
Opts Menu) to Off in both modems.
Configuring an Option Set
This section describes how to configure and save an option set.
From the Modem Front Panel:
1) Read “Preparing for Operation,” earlier in this chapter.
2) Identify the option set for your application. The default is Option Set 1.
the function of front panel control keys).
4) Press
until the modem displays SELECT OPTIONS:n, where n=1-4.
5) Press
to select an option set. The modem displays SELECT OPTIONS=n.
Using the ATZ Command:
1) Read “Preparing for Operation,” earlier in this chapter.
2) Identify the option set for your application. The default is Option Set 1.
3) Type ATZn<CR>, where n=1-4.
NOTE: The modem disconnects from the line when the ATZ command is
entered, and any test in progress is immediately terminated. Since anyAT
command following the ATZ command is ignored by the modem, make sure
ATZ is the last command entered in the command string.
To create a customized option set:
Using the AT&W Command:
1) Using the ATZn command, select an option set n that most closely suits the
application.
example, to change RTS/CTS delay from its time in S-Register 26, to 15 ms,
enter AT DL1<CR>. The front panel displays OK.
*
3) Enter AT&Wn, where n specifies the address (option set) where the new
customized option set is stored.
The front panel displays SAVING OPTIONS.
4) After a few seconds, your modifications are stored in the modem’s nonvolatile
memory, and the modem front panel displays SAVE COMPLETED!
5) Do not turn off modem power until SAVE COMPLETED! appears.
4-10 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From the Modem’s Front Panel:
1) Identify the option set that most closely suits the application. The default is 1.
2) Display the option(s) you want to modify using
and . Fo rexample, to
change Max Rate from 2400 to 7200, display Max Rate: 7200.
Press . The display flashes three times and the colon changes to an equals
sign. The new option is temporarily saved and Max Rate=7200 displays.
3) Step across the Status/Option Sets/Dialing menu by pressing
until you see:
Save Changes=n.
4) Use the
key to display the option set number where you want the changes
saved, and then press . The modem displays Saving Options.
5) After a few seconds, the modifications are stored in the modem’s nonvolatile
memory, and the modem displays SAVE COMPLETED!
6) Do not turn off modem power until SAVE COMPLETED! appears.
Option Set Defaults
Table 4-3.
Option Set Defaults—326X V.32bis and 326X V.34 Modems
Option Set 4
Option Set 4
Parameter
MOD OPT’S
Line
Option Set 1
Option Set 2
Option Set 3
(3260/62/65/67) (3261/63/66/68)
Dial
Dial
Dial
Dial
2W Lease
Mod*
V.32bis Auto/
V. 34 Auto
V.32bis Auto/
V. 34 Auto
V.32bis Auto/
V. 34 Auto
V.32bis Auto/
V. 34 Auto
V.32bis Auto/
V. 34 Auto
Auto Type
Low Speed
Max Rate*
Min Rate
V.34 Asym
Fast Call
Adaptive Rate
Mode
CCITT
CCITT
CCITT
CCITT
CCITT
Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific
14.4/ 33.6
300
14.4/ 33.6
300
14.4/ 33.6
300
14.4/ 33.6
300
14.4/ 33.6
300
[none]/On*
Off
[none]/On*
Off
[none]/On*
Off
[none]/On*
Off
[none]/On*
Off
On
On
On
On
On
Originate
Internal
High BER
Off
Answer
Internal
High BER
Off
Originate
Internal
High BER
Off
Answer
Internal
High BER
Off
Answer
Internal
High BER
Off
Clock
Retrain
Longspace
PSTN
On
On
On
On
On
Guard Tone
Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific
*V.32bis Series default shown first/V.34 Series default shown second
Configuring the Modem 4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-3.
Option Set Defaults—326X V.32bis and 326X V.34 Modems (Continued)
Option Set 4
Option Set 4
Parameter
Option Set 1
Option Set 2
Option Set 3
(3260/62/65/67) (3261/63/66/68)
RESTORAL OPT’S (modems without the restoral function display only the HOLD DIALINE option)
Restore
Off
Off
Off
Off
FP/Auto
Low/Fast
1 Hr
L to D
Low/Fast
Manual
Off
Low/Fast
Manual
Off
Low/Fast
Manual
Off
Low/Fast
Manual
Off
D to L
Hold Dialine
Ans Rest
EC/DC OPT’S
Mode
Off
LL Fail
LL Fail
LL Fail
LL Fail
LL Fail
Auto Rel
Regular
V.42
Direct
Regular
V.42
Direct
Regular
V.42
Auto Rel
Regular
V.42
Direct
Regular
V.42
Buffers
EC
DC
Enabled
Destruct
On
Enabled
Destruct
On
Enabled
Destruct
On
Enabled
Destruct
On
Enabled
Destruct
On
Break
Modem Flow
Delay
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
EC ID
Default
Default
Default
Default
Default
ACU OPT’S
ACU Select
AT Form
V25 Form
NoACU Form
Default Dial
Answer
AT
None
Async
Bitsync
Sync
V.25b
Async
Bitsync
Sync
None
Async
Bitsync
Async
Off
None
Async
Bitsync
Sync
1
Async
Bitsync
Async
Off
Off
Off
Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific Country-specific
Async Echo
Char Length
V25 Char
Sync Idle
V25 Resp
Parity
On
On
On
On
On
10
10
10
10
10
ASCII
Char
ASCII
Char
ASCII
Char
ASCII
Char
ASCII
Char
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
AT Msg
Rslt Code
ResltForm
Con Msg
Rel Msg
LPDA2 Addr
LPDA2 ID
LPDA2 Det
Call Progress
FF
FF
FF
FF
FF
326X
Enable
4
326X
Enable
4
326X
Enable
4
326X
Enable
4
326X
Enable
4
*V.32bis Series default shown first/V.34 Series default shown second
4-12 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-3.
Option Set Defaults—326X V.32bis and 326X V.34 Modems (Continued)
Option Set 4
Option Set 4
Parameter
TERMINAL OPT’S
DTE Rate*
Flow
Option Set 1
Option Set 2
Option Set 3
(3260/62/65/67) (3261/63/66/68)
Auto
XON/XOFF
On
14.4/28.8
XON/XOFF
On
14.4/28.8
XON/XOFF
On
19.2
14.4/28.8
XON/XOFF
On
XON/XOFF
On
Speed Conver
DTR
High
High
AsynSync
0
108.2
Normal
Normal
0
108.2
Normal
Normal
0
Discon
Normal
Normal
0
High
Normal
Normal
0
RTS
CTS
RTS/CTS Delay
DCD
High
Codex
S10
Normal
Codex
S10
Normal
Codex
S10
Normal
Codex
S10
Normal
Codex
S10
RemRST/DCD
DCD Loss Dis
DSR
High
1%
Drop on Disc
1%
Normal
1%
Normal
1%
Normal
1%
Overspeed
DTR Delay
DTE Ct 140
DTE Ct 141
DTE Pin 25
Ext Select
Ext Cntrl
S25
S25
S25
S25
S25
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Test
Test
Test
Test
Test
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Pin 14
S30
Pin 14
S30
Pin 14
S30
Pin 14
S30
Pin 14
S30
Inactivity
*V.32bis Series default shown first/V.34 Series default shown second
Configuring the Modem 4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-4.
Option Set Defaults—326X-SDC V.34 Modem
Option Set 4
(3261/63/66/68)
Option
Option Set 1
Option Set 2
Option Set 3
MOD OPT’S
Line
Dial
Dial
Dial
2W Lease
V.34 Auto
CCITT
Country-specific
33.6
Mod
V.34 Auto
CCITT
Country-specific
33.6
V.34 Auto
CCITT
Country-specific
33.6
V.34 Auto
CCITT
Country-specific
33.6
Auto Type
Low Speed
Max Rate
Min Rate
V.34 Asym
Fast Call
Adaptive Rate
Mode
300
9600
9600
9600
On
On
On
On
Off
Lvl3
Lvl3
Lvl3
On
On
On
On
Originate
Internal
High BER
Off
Answer
External
High BER
Off
Originate
Internal
High BER
Off
Answer
Internal
High BER
Off
Clock
Retrain
Longspace
PSTN
On
On
On
On
Guard Tone
RESTORAL OPT’S
Restore
Country-specific
Country-specific
Country-specific
Country-specific
Off
Off
Off
FP/Auto
Low/Fast
1 Hr
L to D
Low/Fast
Manual
Off
Low/Fast
Manual
Off
Low/Fast
Manual
Off
D to L
Hold Dialine
Ans Rest
EC/DC OPT’S
Mode
5min
LL Fail
LL Fail
LL Fail
LL Fail
Auto Rel
Regular
V.42
Auto Rel
Regular
V.42
Auto Rel
Regular
V.42
Auto Rel
Regular
V.42
Buffers
EC
DC
Enabled
NRZ
Enabled
NRZ
Enabled
NRZ
Enabled
NRZ
Data Form
Break
Destruct
On
Destruct
On
Destruct
On
Destruct
On
Modem Flow
Delay
Off
Off
Buff or S38
Default
Off
EC ID
Default
Default
Default
ACU OPT’S
ACU Select
AT Form
V25 Form
NoACU Form
Default Dial
AT
None
Async
Bitsync
Sync
1
None
Async
Bitsync
Sync
1
None
Async
Bitsync
Sync
1
Async
Bitsync
Async
Off
4-14 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table 4-4.
Option Set Defaults—326X-SDC V.34 Modem (Continued)
Option Set 4
Option
Option Set 1
Country-specific
On
Option Set 2
Country-specific
On
Option Set 3
Country-specific
On
(3261/63/66/68)
Answer
Country-specific
On
Async Echo
Char Length
V25 Char
Sync Idle
10
10
10
10
ASCII
Char
ASCII
Char
ASCII
Char
ASCII
Char
V25 Resp
Parity
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
V25bis
V.25bis
Before CD
Enable
Verbose
DTE Rate
Off
AT Msg
Rslt Code
ResltForm
Con Msg
Rel Msg
LPDA2 Addr
LPDA2 ID
LPDA2 Det
Call Progress
TERMINAL OPT’S
DTE Rate
FF
FF
FF
FF
326X
326X
326X
326X
Enable
4
Enable
4
Enable
4
Enable
4
Auto
56.0 U.S. A., Canada 56.0 U.S. A., Canada 56.0 U.S. A., Canada
64.0 other countries 64.0 other countries 64.0 other countries
Flow
XON/XOFF
—NA—
On
Tx Clk
Rx Clk
On
Tx Clk
Rx Clk
On
Tx Clk
Rx Clk
On
TpDlyMin
Speed Conver
DTR
High
High
AsynSync
0
Tail
108.1
Normal
Normal
0
High
Normal
Normal
0
RTS
Normal
Normal
0
CTS
RTS/CTS Delay
DCD
High
Codex
S10
Normal
Codex
S10
Normal
Codex
S10
Normal
Codex
S10
RemRST/DCD
DCD Loss Dis
DSR
High
1%
Normal
1%
Normal
1%
Normal
1%
Overspeed
DTR Delay
DTE Ct 140
DTE Ct 141
DTE Pin 25
Ext Select
Ext Cntrl
Inactivity
S25
S25
S25
S25
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Test
Test
Test
Test
Off
Off
Off
Off
Pin 14
S30
Pin 14
S30
Pin 14
S30
Pin 14
S30
Configuring the Modem 4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X V.32bis and 326XFAST Modem Application Examples
This section provides application examples for each option set, and notes options
you may need to change from factory default settings for each option set.
For This Type of Application...
Select...
The modem connected to a remote terminal dialing into an asynchronous
host computer (VAX, for example)
Option Set 1
The modem connected to a remote PC dialing into a LAN (remote node
and remote control application)
Option Set 1
Remote X-Terminal dialing to a UNIX workstation or PC into a central site Option Set 1
(for example, a UNIX-based terminal server or mini-computer)
The modem connecting LANs via dial-up router/bridge
Option Set 1
Option Set 1
The modem connected to a terminal calling an X.25 network or an elec-
tronic bulletin board
The modem as an answer modem connected to one of the following:
• A Front End Processor (FEP) or host computer
• An X.25 host/node
Option Set 2
• Asynchronous router/bridge
Cluster controller calling a host computer
Synchronous terminal calling a host computer
Router/bridge calling another router/bridge
X.25 node/host computer calling another X.25 node/host computer
The modem as an external restoral device for leased line failure
Bandwidth on demand for leased line applications
Synchronous Dialing from an IBM AS 400
The modem as an answer modem connected to one of the following:
• An electronic bulletin board
Option Set 3
Option Set 3
Option Set 3
Option Set 3
Option Set 3
Option Set 3
Option Set 3
Option Set 4
(Models 3260/
62/65/67)
• An asynchronous host computer
• A terminal server
• An asynchronous dial-up router/bridge
The modem connecting routers/bridges on a leased line
Option Set 4
(Models 3261/
63/66/68)
The modem connecting an FEP to a cluster controller
The modem connecting two FEPs
Option Set 4
(Models 3261/
63/66/68)
Option Set 4
(Models 3261/
63/66/68)
X.25/statistical multiplexer internodal with dial restoral
Option Set 4
(Models 3261/
63/66/68)
4-16 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option Set 1—Async Calls to Central Site Using AT ACU
Changing Default Configuration Settings
Depending on application requirements, you may need to change the following:
• Buffer Delay (AT DB, EC/DC OPTS category), when enabled, allows
*
buffered data in the communications link to be effectively transmitted to the
other modem before the modems disconnect. Enable this feature if your
application does not ensure a complete transfer of data before the modems
disconnect.
• When the 326X is configured for Option Set 1: if you do not use theAT ACU
to send commands to operate the modem, you must customize the DTE port by
selecting these options:
— DTE Rate. Set the modem’s DTE rate to match the asynchronous DTE’s
rate using the DTE Rate option (AT DE, TERMINAL OPTS category).
*
— Parity. Set the modem’s parity to match the parity set in the asynchro-
nous DTE using the Parity option (AT RP, ACU OPTS category).
*
— Character Length. Set the modem’s character length (Char Length,
ACU OPTS category) to match the length set in the asynchronous DTE.
• In Option Set 1, the default settings assume you will use the AT ACU to oper-
ate the modem (for example, the default for ACU Select=AT; EIA signals are
set high). If you plan on using DTR transitions (“DTR Dialing”) to signal the
modem to make a call (rather than AT Commands), do the following:
1) Set Default Dial=1 (AT DA, ACU OPTS category).
*
2) Store a number in memory location 1 (using Enter Phone #, AT&Z,
9600 T/D? category).
3) Set DTR=108.1 (AT&D, TERMINAL OPTS category). When DTR is
raised, the modem will dial the specified call.
• If the DTE does not require EIA signal pins to be held high, adjust the EIA
settings (TERMINAL OPTS category) to match your application requirements.
• In Option Set 1, the modem is set for XON/XOFF (software) flow control. If
your application requires hardware flow control, change the Flow setting
(AT FL, TERMINAL OPTS category).
*
Configuring the Modem 4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option Set 2—Sync Answering Central Site Without ACU
Changing Default Configuration Settings
Depending on application requirements, you may need to change the following:
• In Option Set 2, the default for network timing is Clock=Internal (AT&X,
MODULATION OPTS category). It may be necessary to change the timing to
external or loopback, depending on the network clocking source.
• In Option Set 2, the default for ACU Select=None. If you want an ACU to
operate the modem, select an ACU and a data format.
• Customize the DTE port as follows:
Set the modem’s DTE rate to match the synchronous DTE’s rate using DTE
*
parameter and setting descriptions.)
that this option is appropriate for your application.
• If the DTE does not provide DTR, the modem will not automatically answer an
incoming call. Set DTR=High (AT&D, TERMINAL OPTS category).
Option Set 3—Sync Calls to Central Site, V.25bis ACU
Changing Default Configuration Settings
Depending on application requirements, you may need to change the following:
• In Option Set 3, the default setting for network timing is Clock=Internal
(AT&X, MODULATION OPTS). It may be necessary to change the timing to
external or loopback, depending on the network clocking source.
• In Option Set 3, the default setting for ACU Select=None. If you want an ACU
to operate the modem, select an ACU and a data format.
• Customize the DTE port by selecting this option:
Set the modem’s DTE rate to match the synchronous DTE’s rate using the
DTE Rate option (AT DE, TERMINAL OPTS).
*
• If you plan on using DTR transitions (“DTR Dialing”) to signal the modem to
make a call (rather than issuing commands from an ACU), do the following:
1) Set Default Dial=1 (AT DA, ACU OPTS category).
*
2) Store a number in memory location 1 (using Enter Phone #, AT&Z,
ATAT 9600 T/D? category).
3) Set DTR=108.1 (AT&D, TERMINAL OPTS category). When DTR is
raised, the modem will dial the specified call.
4-18 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Synchronous Dialing from an IBM AS 400
The modem operates as a synchronous originate modem with the IBM AS 400. Set
the modem to Option Set 3—no reconfiguration from this Option Set is
necessary. The AS 400 supports switched operation with call origination via a
V.25bis compliant call establishment driver.Using Option Set 3 allows it to be driven
by APPC/APPN, the bit-synchronous protocol supported by the IBM AS 400.
In an AS 400-to-AS 400 (mainframe-to-mainframe) environment, the setting of the
Calling Number parameter is critical to ensure the AS 400 operates properly with the
modem. Rather than entering the phone numbers you will be calling, set CALLNBR
to *NONE. This setting allows you to properly utilize V.25bis commands.
Chapter 3, Automatic Calling Interfaces, in the 326X Series Modem Reference
Guide, describes bit-synchronous protocol frame formats.
Option Set 4—Async Answering Central Site without ACU
(Models 3260/62/65/67)
Changing Default Configuration Settings
Depending on application requirements, you may need to change the following:
• The Buffer Delay feature (AT DB, EC/DC OPTS category), when enabled,
*
allows buffered data in the communications link to be effectively transmitted to
the other modem before the modems disconnect. Enable this feature if your
application does not ensure a complete transfer of data before the modems
disconnect.
that this option is appropriate for your application.
• In Option Set 4, the default option for ACU Select=None. If you want an ACU
to operate the modem, select an ACU and a data format.
• If you do not use theAT ACU to send commands to operate the modem,
customize the DTE port as follows:
— Set the modem’s DTE rate to match the asynchronous DTE’s rate using
DTE Rate (AT DE, TERMINAL OPTS category).
*
— Set the modem’s parity to match the parity set in the asynchronous DTE
using Parity (AT RP, ACU OPTS category).
*
— Set the modem’s character length, using Char Length (ACU OPTS
category) to match the character length in the asynchronous DTE.
• In Option Set 4, the modem is set for XON/XOFF (software) flow control. If
your application requires hardware flow control, change the Flow option
(AT FL, TERMINAL OPTS category).
*
• If the DTE does not provide DTR, the modem will not automatically answer an
incoming call. Set DTR=High (AT&D, TERMINAL OPTS category).
Configuring the Modem 4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Option Set 4—Synchronous Leased Line Applications with
Dial Restoral (Models 3261/63/66/68)
Changing Default Configuration Settings
Depending on application requirements, you may change the following options:
• The default Restoral setting in Option Set 4 (leased line models) is Auto/FP.
When first configuring the modem, set Restoral=Off. This prevents erroneous
status errors from displaying while you configure leased line options. After
configuration, if your application requires automatic initiation of dial restoral,
set Restoral=Auto/FP.
• When installing the modem in a leased line application, the default Mode
setting (AT CA, MODULATION OPTS category) is Answer. For proper
*
operation, you must set Mode=Answer in one modem, and
Mode=Originate in the other modem.
• Depending on application requirements, you may change the following:
— Line (MODULATION OPTS). Default option is 2W Lease. Can also be
set for 4W Lease application.
— No ACU Form (ACU OPTS). Default option is Sync. Can be set to
Async.
— Answer (ACU OPTS). Default option is country-specific. Refer to
Appendix C to verify that this option is appropriate for your application.
— Restoral (RESTORAL OPTS). Default option is Auto/FP (as described
above). Can be set to Off to disable restoral.
— Clock (MODULATION OPTS). Default option is Internal. Can be set
to external or loopback, depending on the network clocking source.
— DTE (TERMINAL OPTS). If No ACU Form=Async, customize your
DTE port by selecting these options:
Set the modem’s DTE rate to match the asynchronous DTE’s rate using
DTE Rate (AT DE, TERMINAL OPTS category).
*
Set the modem’s parity to match the parity set in the asynchronous DTE
using Parity (AT RP, ACU OPTS category).
*
Set the modem’s character length to match the character length set in the
asynchronous DTE, using Char Length ACU OPTS category)
4-20 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326XFAST-SDC Modem Application Examples
This section provides application examples for each SDC option set, and notes
options you may need to change from factory default settings for each option set.
This section includes the following:
• SDC Pre-Operation Notes—read this before configuring the modem
• Configuring The Modem for SDC Operation—configuration options that
are critical to ensure optimum network performance on an SDC connection
• SDC Sample Applications—examples of common SDC applications
SDC Pre-Operation Notes
This section contains important information for using the 326XFAST-SDC Modem in
SDC operating mode. Read this section before configuring the unit.
Operational Requirements
• 326XFAST-SDC modems require framed HDLC/SDLC-like data. NOTE: BER
tests do not operate in an SDC environment because the data is not framed.
• 326XFAST-SDC modems support an NRZ or NRZI data encoding method.
Refer to the DTE documentation for information on the data encoding method
*
details on NRZ/NRZI data encoding methods.)
Optimizing Network Performance
The 326XFAST-SDC modem provides front panel displays of RX/TX Throughput
and Link Utilization. Higher values indicate more efficient utilization; lower values
indicate less efficient usage. These values are affected by the attached DTE and
protocol characteristics—frame size, window size, and DTE rate selected.
(Refer to Chapter 1 of the326X Series Modem Reference Guide for a description of
how to use the RX/TX Throughput and Link Utilization displays.)
Telenetics recommends the following to maximize efficiency:
• If your application is operating in a windowed protocol environment, set the
window sizes to greater than 1 to improve performance. Recall that windowing
refers to the number of packets sent before an acknowledgment is required.
• To improve network performance, adjust frame sizes. The optimum frame size
for most applications is between 128 and 1024 bytes. Experiment with window
and frame sizes for maximum performance.
• If link utilization is low, raise the DTE rate. Low link utilization typically
implies that the DTE equipment is the bottleneck in data transmission.
Configuring the Modem 4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Modem for SDC Operation
You can configure the 326XFAST-SDC Modem for SDC in one of these ways:
• Select Option Set 2, 3, or 4Leased, discussed below
• Configure the modem as follows:
— Select one of the reliable data transfer modes (Reliable, Auto Reliable, or
Speed Auto Reliable).
— Choose an Auto-Call Unit (ACU)—AT, V.25bis, LPDA, or None—using
the ACU Select option, ACU OPT’S category.
— Select a bit-synchronous data format (depending on the ACU type).
Ensuring Optimum Network Performance in SDC Mode
The following parameters are critical for ensuring optimum network performance:
• Fast Call (AT FC)
*
• DTE Rate (AT DE)
*
• Flow (AT FL)
*
• TpDlyMin (AT TD)
*
Table 4-4 shows 326X-SDC option set default settings.
Carefully note the following when configuring the modem for SDC operation:
• Fast Call. Both modems must be configured the same in order to connect. If
one of the modems does not support Fast Call, change the default setting to Off.
• DTE Rate. For better link utilization and throughput, higher values than the
default may be appropriate. (Refer to the DTE Rate description in
section for more information.
• Flow/TpDlyMin. The default options assume the DTE can accept
nondisruptive clock stoppage. For DTEs that cannot handle Rx/Tx clock
stoppage without disrupting data, select a different option. In this situation,
Telenetics recommends that the default values not be used.
SDC Sample Applications
SDC Option Set 1—Async Calls to Central Site Using AT ACU
SDC Option Set 1 functions the same as described above for non-SDC modems.
Refer to that section for application examples.
SDC Option Set 2—Sync Dial A/B Restoral
Single Channel Point-to-Point Digital Link Restoral (via A/B Switch)
When used as a dial backup device for a digital network, the SDC modem provides
economical dial backup and/or disaster recovery, at synchronous speeds matching
speeds available on the DDS circuit.
4-22 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When used as a restoral device for Telenetics and Motorola 35XX DSU/CSUs
places the modems in external timing, as digital services typically provide the network
timing.
To 33.6 kbps
PSTN
326XFAST
SDC
326XFAST
SDC
To
56 kbps
56/64 kbps
Router
Router
35XX
35XX
NMS
Network Management Channel
Figure 4-1. Single Channel Point-to-Point Digital Link Restoral (A/B Switch)—Option Set 2
Note the following:
• With SDC Option Set 2 selected (for Telenetics, Motorola, non-Telenetics, and
non-Motorola DSU/CSUs), the DSUs’ restoral configuration should be set to
Timing=Internal.
• In this case, the 326XFAST-SDC DTE Rate must be set to a constant rate as
provided by the network (defaults of 56/64 kbps).
• Enable Option Set 2 in both the local and remote modems, and ensure that Mode
(AT SM) is set the same in both modems.
*
• The SDC modem supports single channel environments only. For example, the
SDC modem can restore Port 1 only of the 35XX device.
• The 35XX device, when initiating restoral, must be set to Normal mode (as the
35XX network management channel is virtually a time division multiplexed data
stream which cannot be compressed with the SDC product).
• The SDC modem may have the ARS feature enabled. In this case, ARS
determines the link rate.
Configuring the Modem 4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure 4-2 shows a configuration using an external A/B switch. Network
configuration (SDC Option Set 2) and operation is the same as with an internal
switch.
To 33.6 kbps
To 56 kbps
PSTN
326XFAST
SDC
326XFAST
SDC
A/B
A/B
56/64 kbps
Router
Router
DSU/CSU
DSU/CSU
NMS
Network Management Channel
Figure 4-2. Single Channel Point-to-Point Digital Link Restoral (A/B Switch)—Option Set 2
4-24 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDC Option Set 3—Sync Dial Only
In a typical dial application, a remote terminal dials the host for file transfers. This
allows remote users to dial in as needed, with a higher throughput than formerly
equipment (e.g., X.25 PADs, routers, bridges). In this configuration, the SDC
modems are used for remote dial-up branch connectivity. This is useful for remote
uploading or downloading data over the PSTN as needed.
Select SDC Option Set 3 for either of these applications.
Note the following:
• With Option Set 3, the modem provides the network timing (Clock=Internal).
• Specify the speed at which the modem communicates with the DTE using the
DTE Rate (AT DE) option, to use a value other than the default. See the DTE
*
• With Option Set 3, the modem originates calls with its V.25bis ACU. DTR is
set to 108.1 so that an off-to-on DTR transition instructs the modem to connect
to the telephone line. If the modem detects an incoming call, the call is
connected. If the modem does not detect an incoming call and you have
enabled Default Dial (AT DA), the modem dials the number specified. If the
*
Default Dial (AT DA) is disabled, the modem refers to the Mode option
*
(AT AC). If set to answer, the modem goes off-hook and sends an answer-
*
back tone. An on-to-off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the
telephone line. If DTR is low, the modem does not auto-answer. DTR
transitions govern how the modem answers and disconnects calls.
• If you want the V.25bis ACU to manipulate the DTR signal, set DTR=108.2.
Other options in the ACU OPT’S category are set for a typical sync DTE.
• Select SDC Option Set 3 in both the local and remote modems, and ensure that
Mode (AT SM) is set the same in both modems.
*
• The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV.34 Auto modulation mode.
This ensures maximum throughput when line quality is poor.
PSTN
To 56/64 kbps
326XFAST
SDC
326XFAST
SDC
NMS
DTE
Host
Network Management Channel
Figure 4-3. 326X-SDC Dial-Only Application—Option Set 3
Configuring the Modem 4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bandwidth On Demand
Bandwidth on demand is often required to support sporadic peak loads. With the
SDC modem, you can ensure full network availability and performance at low dial-
up line costs, without having to prioritize users or applications.
Figure 4-4 shows a point-to-point digital link with Telenetics 35XX DSU/CSUs
connecting two routers over a DDS circuit. The SDC modems are also connected
directly to the routers. During peak network access periods, the router is configured
to signal the SDC modem to establish a dial connection through the PSTN. Users
transparently bypass the digital link, using the 326XFAST-SDC PSTN link to
continue data transmission. As bandwidth demands subside, the dial call is dropped,
and transmission resumes over the DDS link.
The SDC modem supports all industry-standard ACUs (AT, V.25bis, DTR dialing,
and LPDA-2). Bandwidth on demand can be initiated/terminated under the control of
the nodal equipment by a secondary port. NOTE: Nodal equipment must be
configured for secondary port restoral/bandwidth on demand operation. Refer to the
nodal equipment documentation for instructions on configuring for this application.
Select SDC Option Set 3 for a bandwidth on demand application. All operational
To 33.6 kbps
PSTN
326XFAST
SDC
326XFAST
SDC
To
56 kbps
56 kbps
Router
Router
35XX
35XX
Network Management Channel
NMS
Figure 4-4. Bandwidth On Demand—Option Set 3
4-26 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SDC Option Set 4—Sync Leased Line with Dial Restoral; N oACU
(Models 3261/63/66/68)
Point-to-Point Leased Line Application with Dial Restoral
Figure 4-5 shows a typical point-to-point leased line application, with SDC modems
providing leased line and dial back-up for a bridge/router network. A Telenetics
Network Management System (NMS) is shown. This application could apply to any
nodal equipment connections (e.g., bridges, routers, or X.25 PADs).
With the modem’s integral restoral capabilities, if leased circuit operation is
disrupted, the modems restore the connection over a single dial line through the
PSTN.
The modem uses the adaptive rate feature in theV.34 Auto modulation mode. This
ensures maximum throughput when line quality deteriorates. If restoral criteria are
met, the modem automatically reroutes data traffic through the PSTN. At that time,
the modem attempts to run at its maximum rate over the dial line, and falls back to
lower speeds if required. After an hour, the modem returns to the leased line.
Select SDC Option Set 4 for this application.
Note the following:
• The line configuration default of Option Set 4 is Two-Wire Leased Line.
• With Option Set 4, the modem provides the network timing (Clock=Internal).
• To specify a non-default rate at which the modem communicates with the DTE,
*
• Select SDC Option Set 4 in both the local and remote modems, and ensure that
Mode (AT SM) is set the same in both modems.
*
• If operating with the Telenetics or Motorola 6500PLUS that has the Link Back-
Up option, set DTR=108.2 (the default is 108.1 for 6500s without the Link
Back-Up option).
PSTN
To 56/64 kbps
326XFAST
SDC
Bridge/
Router
326XFAST
SDC
Bridge/
Router
33.6 kbps
NMS
Network Management Channel
Figure 4-5. Point-to-Point Leased Line Application with Dial Restoral—Option Set 4
Configuring the Modem 4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Access Reset
Remote access reset enables someone unfamiliar with the AT command set to
quickly configure a local modem so that another modem can dial into it. Then you
can use the remote modem to configure local modem options. Remote access reset
configures the modem to:
• Answer an incoming call
• Accept a network management session
• Accept a remote configuration session initiated by the calling modem
• Disconnect a call if one is in progress
• End any test in progress
Operation
To select remote access reset, press
and simultaneously for three seconds. Rmt
Access Reset displays. The modem resets itself to settings that let it answer a call
and be accessed by an NMS or remote modem. The modem may be dialed into and
reconfigured. Stored phone numbers and saved option sets remain unchanged.
When Remote Access Reset Is Disabled
Remote access reset is not supported when the modem is attached to a network
management system. If you select it in this situation, NETMAN ATTACHED!
displays. To invoke remote access reset, set OverrideMode=On (NETWK CRTL
OPT’S).
Remote access reset is not supported when the modem is password protected
(i.e., when pressing
and
for three seconds displays PASSWD
PROTECTED). To choose the remote access feature, you must first unlock the
modem, either from the front panel, or with the AT PN (enter password)
*
command.
4-28 Configuring the Modem
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Contents
Using AT Commands ....................................................................................
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
The 326X Series Modem supports an asynchronous AT Automatic Calling Interface
(Auto-Call Unit or ACU), that is compatible with the industry-standard AT
command set.
AT commands provide a standard modem communications interface, allowing you to
configure and operate a modem from an asynchronous terminal or PC keyboard. AT
commands define how the modem is configured, how it makes calls, and the test
operations the modem performs. In addition to supporting industry standard AT
commands, Telenetics has developed an enhanced AT command set for the modem.
• Industry-Standard AT Command Set—AT and AT&
These commands, called action AT commands, are intended for immediate
modem action and let you perform day-to-day operations, such as dialing and
storing numbers from your asynchronous DTE. TheseAT commands do not
cross-reference to the modem front panel.
• Telenetics Enhanced AT Command Set—AT
*
Using these Telenetics AT extensions, you can also configure most modem
options. These AT commands, called configuration AT commands, control the
same options as in your modem’s front panel menu tree.
This chapter discusses:
• The AT Command Set
• Using AT commands
• Action AT commands
• S-Registers
For an alphabetized quick-reference list of AT commands, corresponding front panel
The 326X Series Modem supports two additional ACUs:
• V.25bis ACU, for asynchronous and synchronous applications
• LPDA2 ACU, for synchronous applications
For details, refer to Chapter 3 in the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
If you are using communications software, you normally do not use the AT
command set directly. Your communications software will do this for you.
5-2 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the Attention (AT) Command Set?
The AT command set is a collection of commands that let you configure a modem
directly from an asynchronous terminal or PC keyboard. The characters AT are a
prefix to the commands you issue to your modem. When you type AT, you are asking
for the modem’s attention. For instance, to disconnect a telephone call, you type AT
for attention and H0 for on-hook (hang up).
You can also use AT commands to configure a remote modem (refer to Chapter 2,
Front Panel Operation, of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide for details).
What Role Does Communications Software Play?
Some communications software packages “interpret”AT commands with pull-down
menus or graphics, making familiarity with the AT command syntax unnecessary.
Communications software packages that directly support the 326X Series Modem
usually support all of the modem’s AT commands (the industry standard commands
AT, AT&, and the Telenetics-enhanced commands AT ).
*
Communications software packages that support a Hayes-compatible selection do
not support the Telenetics-enhanced commands (AT ). You can enter these
*
commands yourself to modify option settings if required by your application.
Check the documentation included with your communications software package to
determine whether you need to useAT commands directly.
Using AT Commands
AT commands are accepted by the modem in command mode or escape mode.
• The modem is in command mode when it is disconnected from the
telephone line.
• You can enter escape mode and issue AT commands during a connection
(the escape sequence +++ is described later in this chapter).
Entering AT Command Lines
To enter a single AT command line:
1) Enter the prefix AT: The characters AT (upper-case or lower-case, but not
mixed) must begin the command line.
2) Enter an AT command. For example:
— D instructs the modem to dial a call. H instructs the modem to hang up. A
numeric character (for example, 2) following an AT command instructs
the modem to use a specific command option. If a numeric character is
not indicated, the modem assumes the 0 (zero) option.
3) End with a carriage return <CR>.
The exceptions to the aboveAT command line conventions are“A/” (repeat last
command) and “+++” (the escape sequence). Responses (result codes) to AT
commands always appear in upper-case.
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To enter multiple AT commands on a single command line:
Multiple AT commands can be entered on a command line using a single AT prefix.
The modem accepts up to 60 characters after the prefix. Spaces are not counted in the
length. AT commands are interpreted in sequence in the command line until one of
the following occurs:
• A <CR> is encountered
• An invalid command is encountered
• A command is encountered which causes the modem to reset, go off-hook, or
enter a test state
For example, you might enter:
ATE0V1&W<CR>
on a single command line. This command disables Asynchronous Echo. It configures
the Result Code Format to Verbose, and the Save Changes feature to Option Set 1.
Commands that are followed by a telephone number must be at the end of the line.
However, if the semicolon dial modifier (;) follows a telephone number, the modem
returns to command mode after dialing. Therefore, AT commands can be entered
after a semicolon in a command string. NOTE: If an error occurs, AT commands
prior to the error are executed; commands following the error are ignored.
If you enter an AT command that requires a postscript number and no number is
entered, the modem defaults to a 0 setting.
AT Command String Examples
Table 5-1.
Interpreting AT Command Strings
Command
Interpretation
AT&X<CR>
Postscript number needed and none is provided. 0 is assumed.
Transmitter timing is set for internal.
ATS2
No response. Needs a carriage return after the command.
GATE0<CR>
Ignores everything before theAT prefix. The G is ignored. This
command disables the asynchronous echo feature.
ATS2?Q=1<CR> Multiple command line. Selects S-Register 2 as the current S-Register,
displays contents of S-Register 2, turns on result code displays, and
sets S-Register 2 to 1.
For Further Detail on AT Commands
5-4 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Autobaud Feature
The modem automatically detects the speed and character format of the following
AT commands issued from your DTE:
• AT
• at
• A/
• a/
This means that any AT command you issue to the modem will cause the modem to
“Autobaud.” The exception is the lower-case “a/” and upper-case“A/”, from which
only speed can be detected. When the a/ or A/ commands are issued, the modem
assumes parity to be the same as that of the previous command.
NOTE: Autobaud does not operate when the modem is online in escape mode.
Autobauding works at the following DTE rates (bps):
300
1200
2400
4800
7200
9600
12,000
26,400
14,400
28,800
16,800
38,400
19,200
57,600
21,600
115,200
24,000
Table 5-2 summarizes the 10-bit-total character formats for autobauding.
(Autobauding is valid only with 10-bit character formats.)
Table 5-2.
Valid Autobauding Character Formats
Start Bit
Data Bits
Parity
Stop Bits
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
8
Even or Odd
None
Mark or Space
None
1
2
1
1
Result codes, such as RING, are sent at the last autobauded DTE speed and parity.
CONNECT result codes are also sent at the last autobauded DTE speed, even if the
call is established at a different speed. When the modem is turned on, the last
autobauded speed is saved. Because parity is saved within option sets, the parity
value that is saved in the power-up option set is the one that is active.
The Escape Sequence—(+++)
The escape sequence is used when the modem is online and you need to enter
commands to the modem without disconnecting. The escape sequence with guard
time protects against losing the connection while you send commands.
NOTE: Autobaud does not operate when the modem is in escape mode.
Once in command state, you can:
• Terminate a call
• Initiate and terminate a test
• Issue AT action commands
• Change your modem’s configuration
• Initiate a remote configuration session
• Read modem status using the AT ST command
*
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The escape state is entered by sending the escape character three consecutive times.
The escape character is selectable as any ASCII character. Its value is stored in
S-Register 2, and the default is “+” (decimal 43). To disable escape command
detection, set S-Register 2 to a value greater than 127.
A guard time is used with the escape sequence. A guard time must precede and
follow the sequence of escape characters to prevent the +++ characters from
inadvertently placing the modem into command mode if they are transmitted in a
message. If data is sent within the guard time, the escape sequence is not detected.
The default guard time is one second.
The guard time specified by S-Register 12 also specifies the maximum time between
the three consecutive escape characters. If more than the allowable time elapses
between escape characters, the escape sequence is ignored. Setting S-Register 12 to
zero disables the guard time, so that the rate at which you enter the escape sequence
is not a factor.
To use the escape sequence with guard time:
1) Pause a bit longer than the guard time.
2) Send +++, ensuring the delay between +’s is less than the specified guard
time.
When a valid escape sequence is detected, the modem responds with
OK
Do not send commands until the OK response has been received. A command
that is sent too soon may not be interpreted correctly.
3) Pause again, a bit longer than the guard time.
4) Enter commands to the modem.
5) When you are ready to resume the call to the remote system, type ATO<CR>.
The modem returns to the online state.
When using error correction, if you “escape” from the data state to the command
state, the modem buffers any data received from the remote site. When you return
online (to data state), the buffered data is sent to the DTE.
Non-Configuration AT Commands
Most AT commands cross-reference to a front panel option. Some AT commands are
intended only for immediate modem action. These commands allow you to perform
a number of the important day-to-day modem functions, such as:
• Re-execute your last command
• Answer an incoming call
• Dial a telephone number
• Hang up
• Exit command mode, return to data mode
• Redial the last telephone number
5-6 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This section addresses AT commands that do not cross-reference to a front panel
option.
A/, Re-Execute Last Command
Settings: Not applicable
Format:
A/
This command re-executes the last AT command string issued to the modem,
including redialing a telephone number. To re-execute the last command, enter A/
but do not follow this command with <CR>.
The A/ command may be entered in either uppercase or lowercase characters.
However, when entered in lowercase characters, the modem cannot use the autobaud
feature to determine parity. The modem continues to use the parity determined by the
previous command. The AT ZD (Dial Rstrct) AT command limits the A/ command.
*
The modem does not support auto-parity for this command.
ATA, Manual Answer
Settings: Not applicable
Format:
ATA<CR>
This command instructs the modem to go off-hook and send answer-back tone over
the line. When the ATA command is used during an incoming call, the modem
initiates the “answer” end of the modulation mode handshake sequence. DSR
transitions from off to on when the answer-back tone is sent if DSR is not configured
for the High setting. If the modem is using error correction, the error-correction link
handshake takes place after the modulation mode handshake, and before DCD
(if DCD is not configured for the High setting) transitions from off to on.
This command causes the modem to answer a call regardless of the contents of
S-Register 0 (Ring Count to Answer On).
If the ATA command is issued while the modem is in escape mode or in remote
configuration, the modem responds with:
ERROR
ATD, Dial
To dial directly from the keyboard, enter ATD followed by the number you want to
dial. For example:
ATD1-617-555-1212<CR>
The ATD command causes the modem to go off-hook, dial the number, and execute
all dial modifiers in the dial string. The type of call progress message you see is
controlled by the Call Progress (ATX) setting. The modem can dial up to 50
characters, including spaces.
In originate mode, if theATD command is issued without a phone number, the
modem goes off-hook.
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If ATD is issued while the modem is in escape mode or remote configuration, the
modem responds with:
ERROR
NOTE: Any invalid characters inserted into the dial string will be ignored.
ATH, Hang Up
Settings: 0, Modem hangs up
1, Busy Out the modem
Format:
ATHn<CR>
You may hang up the modem after entering the online escape mode by typing ATH
or ATH0. Typing ATH1 while in command mode causes the modem to Busy Out
until either the ATH command is entered or the
key is pressed. NOTE: For busy
out, make certain that the TELCO OPT’S Telco option is set for RJ4MB.
ATI, Display Software Information
Settings: 0, Displays 960
1, Displays 000
2, Displays OK
9, Displays reason for last disconnect
Format:
ATIn<CR>
The messages described above are displayed in addition to the “OK” sent whenAT
command processing is complete. NOTE: If this command is the last or only
command in a command line, an additional “OK” message follows the above
responses.
ATO, Leave Command Mode
Settings: 0, Leave command mode and return online
1, Leave command mode, return online, and initiate a retrain
Format:
AT0n<CR>
This command can be used only when the modem is in the online escape mode, or
after a “;” (semicolon) dial modifier in a dial string.
The user may leave escape mode and return to data mode by typing ATO or ATO0.
If a retrain is desired while returning to data mode, ATO1 must be used.
If this command is issued while the modem is disconnected from the phone line, the
modem responds with:
NO CARRIER
If this command is issued while the modem is in a remote configuration session, the
modem responds with:
ERROR
NOTE: If the ATO command is issued after a “;” (semicolon) dial modifier (return
to command state after dialing), the modem trains as an originate modem.
5-8 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT RD, Redial Last Number
*
Settings: 0, 1 Redial last number one time.
n (The maximum number of redials allowed is country-specific. See the
326X Series Modem Country-Specific Guide for more details).
Format:
AT RDn<CR>
*
You may redial a failed call n times using the AT RD command. The modem
redials a call until a successful connection is made, or until the call has been
*
attempted n times. The AT RD command causes the modem to redial the last
*
number dialed. So if an initial call fails, and the telephone number is linked to
another number, the modem redials the linked telephone number.
S-Registers
S-registers are memory locations for storing specific configuration and operating
parameters. S-registers typically contain timing, counting, ASCII characters, or
command option values. While communications software generally insulates you
from the need to alter S-register settings, you may want to reconfigure or read the
contents of an S-register. This section describes how to read and change S-Register
values.
This section is in two parts:
• The first part describes the AT commands used to display and change
S-Register values.
• The second part describes S-Registers used by the modem.
Any S-Register that is not stored in memory is reset to its default value when you:
• Power up the modem
• Load a new Option Set
• Reinitialize memory
Displaying and Changing S-Register Values
Display S-Register Value (ATSn?)
Settings: n, Specifies S-Register
Format:
ATSn?<CR>
This command displays the value of S-Register n, as stored in volatile memory.
If a “?” appears in the command string anywhere other than immediately following
the S-Register number, the command displays the value of the last S-Register
selected.
If you try to read the value of an unused S-Register, the modem displays OK.
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display S-Register Value (AT?)
Settings: Selected S-Register
Format:
AT?<CR>
This command displays the contents of the “selected” S-Register, as stored in volatile
memory. The “selected” S-Register is the last S-Register that was accessed using an
S-Register command or the ATSn command. The number must be within the
S-Register’s specified range. On power-up, S-Register 0 is “selected.”
If you try to read the contents of an unused S-Register, the modem displays OK.
Change S-Register Value (ATSx=n)
Settings: n, Specifies S-Register
x, Specifies value of S-Register
Format:
ATSn=x<CR>
This command lets you change the value of an S-Register stored in volatile
memory. n is the S-Register to change, and x is the value. x must be a number
within the S-Register’s range.
If you try to change the value of an unused S-Register, the modem displays OK.
Change S-Register Value (AT=x)
Settings: x, Specifies value of selected S-Register
Format:
AT=x<CR>
This command lets you change the value of an S-Register stored in volatile memory.
The “selected” S-Register is the last S-Register that was accessed using an
S-Register command or the ATSn command. x must be a number within the specified
range for the S-Register. On power-up, S-Register 0 is “selected.”
If you try to change the value of an unused S-Register, the modem displays OK.
S-Register Descriptions
S-Register 0—Ring Count to Answer On
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
0
0 to 255
This S-Register specifies the ring on which the modem automatically answers a call.
When set to 0, automatic answering is disabled, and calls must be answered manually.
This register has no meaning unless Answer=Using S0 (ACU OPT’S).
5-10 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 1—Ring Count
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
No
Yes
Default Setting:
Range:
0
0 to 255
This S-Register counts the number of rings in an incoming telephone call. If the
modem is configured to answer (AT AA, or Answer=S0), when S-Register 1’s
*
value equals S-Register 0’s value, the modem answers the call. If no ring is received
after a country-specific time (eight to 10 seconds), the counter is reset to 0.
S-Register 2—Escape Code Character
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
43
0 to 255
This S-Register determines the decimal value of the escape code character.
The default setting, 43, translates to the ASCII “+” character. Values greater than 127
disable the escape function.
S-Register 3—Carriage Return Character
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
No
No
Default Setting:
Range:
13
0 to 127
This S-Register determines the decimal value of the carriage return character.
The default setting, 13, translates to the ASCII <CR> (carriage return) character.
S-Register 4—Line Feed Character
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
No
No
Default Setting:
Range:
10
0 to 127
This S-Register determines the decimal value of the line feed character. The default
setting, 10, translates to the ASCII <LF> (line feed) character.
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 5—Backspace Character
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
No
No
Default Setting:
Range:
8
0 to 127
This S-Register determines the decimal value of the backspace character. The default
setting, 08, translates to the ASCII <BS> (backspace) character. Values greater than
32 (except 127) disable the backspace function.
S-Register 6—Wait for Dial Tone
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
2
1 to 255 (seconds)
If Call Progress is set to 0, 1, or 3 (ATX0, ATX1, ATX3), and blind dial is selected,
the modem does not look for a dial tone. Instead, the modem goes off-hook and waits
for the number of seconds specified by S-Register 6 before blind dialing a telephone
number (if Blind Dial is set to S6, AT BD2). This S-Register does not affect the
*
wait dial modifiers W, w, or :.
S-Register 7—Wait for Data Carrier
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
30
1 to 255 (seconds)
If Call Timeout (AT TT) is set to S7, the value of S-Register 7 determines the
*
number of seconds that the modem waits for a carrier signal from the remote modem
after dialing or answering a call.
S-Register 7 also affects the dial modifiers @, W, w, and :.
Dial Modifier “@”
If Call Timeout (AT TT) is set to S7, the value of S-Register 7 determines the
*
length of time for which the @ dial modifier instructs the modem to detect five
seconds of silence.
Dial Modifier “W”, “w”, and “:”
If the Dial Wait option (AT DD) is set to S7, the value of S-Register 7 determines
*
the value of the dial wait modifier. The dial wait modifier determines how long the
modem waits for a second dial tone after the modem has dialed a number.
5-12 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 8—Pause Time for Pause Delay Dial Modifiers
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
2
0 to 255 (seconds)
This S-Register determines how many seconds the modem pauses while dialing
when it encounters a K, k, “,”, or < dial modifier. Pause Delay (AT DP) must be set
*
to S8 (AT DP4) to use S-Register 8’s setting.
*
This S-Register also determines the time duration of the pause delay for the “,”
character when used in an AT command string. The modem pauses for the specified
time before continuing to process the command string.
With the “,” k, K, or < dial modifier, if S-Register 8 is set to 0 or 1, the pause delay
defaults to two seconds.
S-Register 10—Carrier Loss Hang Up Delay
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
15
1 to 255
S-Register 10 determines how long, in 100 millisecond increments, data carrier must
be lost before the modem hangs up. NOTE: This applies to V.22bis, B212, V.21, and
B103 operation only. To use S-Register 10’s setting, the front panel DCD Loss Dis
option (AT CD) must be set to S10. Also, if S-Register 10 is set to 255, the modem
*
will not hang up because of a carrier loss.
Setting the AT CD (DCD Loss Disconnect option under the TERMINAL OPT’S
*
menu) to S10 enables the DCE disconnect feature, for V.32, V.32bis, and V.34
modulation modes. For these modes, the S-Register 10 determines the length of time,
in seconds, for the modem to disconnect when the remote modem goes on hook
without sending a longspace or PSTN cleardown.
In Normal or Direct modes, S10 must be set between 1–9 seconds. For Reliable
mode, S10 must be set between 1–8 seconds. These selections result in Disconnect in
the specified time after the modem leaves data mode and starts to retrain. Values of
S10 other than the ones specified above disable the DCE Disconnect feature.
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 11—DTMF Tone Duration
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
72
50 to 255 (country-specific)
S-Register 11 defines the duration/spacing of tones (in milliseconds) in DualTone
Multifrequency (DTMF) dialing. This register has no meaning unless the Tone
Length option under the DIALING OPT’S is set to S11. Refer to Appendix C,
Country-Specific Information, for the ranges supported by each country.
S-Register 12—Escape Code Guard Time
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
No
No
Default Setting:
Range:
50 (1 second)
0 to 255
This S-Register sets the interval that must be present on either side of the escape
code (+++) in order for the modem to recognize the escape command and enter
command mode. This prevents the +++ characters from putting the modem in
command mode if they are contained in data. The value of S-Register 12 is
multiplied by 0.02 to determine the number of seconds. For example, the value of the
factory default 50 is one second.
If S-Register 12 is set to 0, the speed at which you enter the escape sequence is not a
factor.
S-Register 18—Test Timer
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default Setting:
Range:
0
0 to 255 (seconds)
This S-Register determines the duration, in seconds, of loopback tests.
With S-Register 18 set to 0, the timer is not operational and tests must be terminated
manually. NOTE: S-Register 18’s function is valid only when loopback tests are
issued using the AT&T command. S-Register 18 cannot be used to automatically
terminate loopback tests if the test is initiated from the front panel.
5-14 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 25—Delay Before Looking for DTR
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
Status-Only?:
Default:
No
5
Range:
0 to 255 (seconds)
When DTR Delay=S25 (AT DT), and AT Form=Sync Data (AT&M) or V25
*
Form=AsynSync, the modem goes into synchronous data mode after the modem
dials asynchronously. S-Register 25 lets you switch from an asynchronous DTE to a
synchronous DTE without hanging up. S-Register 25 allows this switch by
specifying how many seconds the modem waits after connecting before looking for
DTR.
S-Register 26—RTS/CTS Delay
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
Status-Only?:
Default:
No
1
Range:
0 to 255
This S-Register selects the delay between CTS and RTS while the modem is online.
It operates in modes specified by the RTS (AT RS) and CTS (AT CT) commands.
*
*
The time is selectable in 1/100 second intervals, from 0 to 2.55 seconds.
S-Register 30—DTE Inactivity Disconnect
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
Status-Only?:
Default:
No
0
Range:
0 to 255 (x 10 seconds)
If DTE Inactivity=S30 (AT SI), the modem disconnects when data is not sent or
*
received for an amount of time greater than the value stored in S-Register 30,
multiplied by 10 seconds. Time-outs range from 10 to 2550 seconds (42.5 minutes).
A value of 0 stored in S-Register 30 disables the DTE inactivity option.
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 38—Disconnect Buffer Delay
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
Status-Only?:
Default:
No
5
Range:
0 to 255 (seconds)
S-Register 38 determines how long the modem processes buffered data when a
disconnect is initiated. For S-Register 38 to affect the Delay option (AT DB),
*
Delay (EC OPT’S menu) must be set to “Buf or S38” or “Buf & S38.”
S-Register 45—Access Security Tone Duration
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
Status-Only?:
Default:
No
5
Range:
0 to 10 (seconds)
This S-Register specifies the prompt tone duration when the ACCESS SECURITY
option Tone=Prompt Only or Prompt/Ack (AT ZP). This delay is measured from
*
the time that the prompt tone is generated by the answer modem, to the time that the
answer modem detects the first digit of the calling modem’s password.
S-Register 46—Access Security Lead Digit Delay Timeout
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
Status-Only?:
Default:
No
12
Range:
0 to 255 (seconds)
This S-Register specifies the lead digit delay timeout when ACCESS SECURITY
Tone (AT ZP) is enabled.
*
S-Register 96—Signalling System #5
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
No
0
Status-Only?:
Default:
Range:
0 - 1
This S-Register specifies whether Signalling System #5 is enabled.
5-16 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 97—Break Signal Duration
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Status-Only?:
Yes
No
Default:
0 (represents 1 second)
0 - 39
Range:
S-Register 97 Value
Break Signal Duration (ms.)
0
1
1000 (1 second)
26
2
52
3
78
4
5
6
7
8
9
104
130
156
182
208
234
260
286
312
338
364
390
416
442
468
494
520
546
572
598
624
650
676
702
728
754
780
806
832
858
884
910
936
962
988
1000
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface 5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register 98—AC Detect
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
No
0
Status-Only?:
Default:
Range:
0 - 1
This S-Register applies to V.32bis and V.34 operating modes. It enables and disables
AC Tone Protect, which is part of the modem’s training sequence.
S-Register 99—V.32 Training Time
Stored in Nonvolatile Memory?:
Yes
Status-Only?:
Default:
No
0
Range:
0 to 216*
*One unit = 32 baud = 13.5 milliseconds.
This S-Register extends part of the V.32 modulation mode training time. It provides a
workaround to an inability of Rockwell-based modems to establish a connection.
Telenetics recommends that with Rockwell-based modems, you set S-99 to 120.
5-18 Using the AT Automatic Calling Interface
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
Most problems encountered when installing and using the modem can be corrected if
you carefully read and follow the instructions in the documentation. Use the
Troubleshooting section of this chapter to analyze and correct problems before
calling Telenetics’ Customer Support Center or your local distributor.
The section after the troubleshooting guide tells you how to initiate and terminate
tests. Chapter 4 of the326X Series Modem Reference Guide contains detailed
information on these tests.
Assumptions
• The modem is set to factory default configurations.
• The modem has been installed with all initial cabling complete.
Troubleshooting
This section discusses:
• Dial operation problems
• Synchronous data compression (SDC) mode problems
• Leased line operation problems
The First Step
First, confirm that your data communications application is set up correctly:
• Confirm that your communications software is configured for the correct serial
port to which your modem is connected (i.e., COMM1, COMM2, etc.)
• Confirm the COM port is configured for the data rate, word length, and parity
your configuration requires
• Confirm that the cable connecting the modem to the host equipment is a
DCE-to-DTE straight-through cable
• Confirm the electrical interface of your modem (V.35 or RS-232) and ensure
that you have the correct cable installed
Troubleshooting Steps
Use the table that follows to match your problem with a diagnosis and solution.
6-2 Troubleshooting Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide
Problem
Diagnosis/Test
Possible Solution
During installation:
Modem won't power up Check AC power.
Check modem's power switch.
Repeat power-up sequence.
Ensure AC outlet is active.
Turn on power switch.
Modem fails self test
(front panel displays
error code)
If modem fails once again, call Telenetics’ Customer
Support or your local distributor and report the error
code.
Modem doesn't come up Check DIP Switch #6 on
in ready state— “326X modem's rear panel.
Ready” on front panel
• Ensure DIP Switch #6 is in the Off (up) position.
• Power cycle the modem.
display
While operating the 326X as a dial modem:
ACU
CONFIGURATION
No response to ACU
command
Check that TD LED on front
panel lights when commands are
being sent to the modem.
• If light does not come on, check that cables are
properly connected.
• Check the communications software package for
correct communications port configuration.
• Check that the communications software package’s
baud rate is set to a rate that the modem’s autobaud
feature supports.
Check modem's configuration:
• Ensure ACU is compatible with modem's
configuration.
• Make sure the DTE is set to a valid character format
to operate the modem’s autobaud feature
• DTE Rate (AT DE)
*
• ACU Form
• Char Length
• Parity (AT RP)
• If modem still does not respond after modifying
configuration, perform a local analog loopback
(LAL) test. (Refer to the end of this chapter for
details on tests supported, as well as instructions for
initiating tests.)
*
• Result Code (ATQ)
• If LAL fails, contact Telenetics Customer Support or
your local distributor.
Double echo on
characters typed
Check echo setting on data
terminal equipment and modem. terminals, echo is sometimes referred to as half- or full-
duplex.) If this does not solve the problem, contact Tele-
If both echo settings are on, turn one off. (In some data
netics Customer Support or your local distributor.
Check the terminal setup of the
communications software.
CALL ESTABLISHMENT
Modem won't answer Check the modem's
configuration:
• Answer (AT AA)
Ensure that Answer is not set to Manual.
*
• DTR (AT&D)
Set DTR=High (AT&D0).
Troubleshooting Guide 6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)
Problem
Diagnosis/Test
Possible Solution
Check the modem's line setting Ensure Line=Dial (AT&L0).
(AT&L).
Check that the TR LED on
modem's front panel is steady
on.
If the TR LED is not steady on, ensure the DTE is
supplying DTR.
Check that the RI/OH LED is on Check that the phone number you are calling is correct.
when ring is present on the line.
Check that the communications
package’s data rate is set to a
rate that the modem’s autobaud
feature supports.
Modem won't dial
Ensure dial tone is present.
Check phone line and ensure it is properly connected to
the modem’s rear panel.
If using DTR dial, check:
• Default dial option
Ensure default dial option is set to a location with a valid
phone number.
(AT DA)
*
• Phone number at stored
location (presence of one)
• DTR option (AT&D)
Ensure that DTR=108.1 (AT&D5) or Tail (AT&D4).
Ensure the DTE is supplying DTR.
Check that the communications
package’s data rate is set to a
rate that the modem’s autobaud
feature supports.
Unable to establish a
connection
Check the disconnect code from Based on the disconnect reason, take the appropriate
the front panel or AT response. action.
Check the modulation
configuration:
• Mod (AT MM)
Ensure that Mod=C.Fast Auto or V32bis Auto.
*
• Max Rate (AT MX)
*
• Min Rate (AT MN)
*
Check EC/DC Mode (AT SM) Ensure Mode=AutoRel (AT SM3) on both the local and
*
*
option.
remote modems.
Software package
displays on-line
Ensure DCD=Normal (AT&C1). If DCD is not set to Normal, issueAT&C1 from the DTE
or set DCD=Normal from the front panel.
connection status before
calling or answering is
performed
A call is established but Read the disconnect code.
not maintained
Based on the disconnect reason, take the appropriate
action.
6-4 Troubleshooting Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)
Problem Diagnosis/Test Possible Solution
Cannot hear connection Check Speaker (ATM) option. If the speaker is not on, turn it on.
through the speaker
(stand-alone units)
Check Volume (ATL) option.
Adjust volume.
DATA MODE
The modem connects,
but cannot pass data
Check that the modem is in data If the modem is not in data mode, establish a connection
mode (“Data 9600”, for
with the remote modem.
example, displays).
Check that the TD LED is lit on
modem's front panel (steady or
flashing) indicating that the
modem is receiving data from
the DTE.
• Check DTE for EIA signal requirements.
• Ensure the modem is correctly cabled to the DTE
(with a straight-through cable for your electrical
interface—V.35 or RS-232).
• Check that the correct communications port is being
used.
Check the DTE rate of the local Ensure that the DTE rate matches the modem’s terminal
modem.
rate setting.
Check the DTE's flow control
method.
• Ensure that the DTE's flow control is the same as the
modem’s setting
(for example, XON-XOFF, RTS/CTS).
• If your communications software package’s file
transfer protocol is used, and the package supports
RTS/CTS Flow control, set Flow=RTS/CTS
(AT FL3). If the package does not support RTS/
*
CTS flow control, set Flow=Off (AT FL0).
*
If in normal mode, check for
modem-to-modem flow control.
Turn modem flow control off.
Verify line quality:
• Run a remote digital
loopback (RDL) or RDL
with pattern test.
After running the RDL, if no errors occur, your line is
good.
If errors occur, perform a manual retrain, or retry the
phone call.
• If you are still receiving
errors, disconnect the
If the LAL or LAL with pattern test fails, contact Telenet-
ics Customer Support or your local distributor.
modem from the line and
perform a local analog
loopback (LAL) or LAL
with pattern test (with
modem flow control off).
If the LAL or LAL with pattern test passes, you may have
a line problem (contact your telephone company) or a
problem with your application (check with your software
vendor).
Premature disconnect
Ensure that the remote modem
supports error correction.
If the remote modem does not support error correction,
set the modem to normal mode and retry the call.
Check the disconnect reason
from the modem's front panel.
Based upon the disconnect reason, take the appropriate
action.
Troubleshooting Guide 6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)
Problem
Diagnosis/Test
Possible Solution
Data is garbled or lost Check the modem’s flow control
• Ensure that the DTE's flow control is the same as the
modem setting
settings.
(for example, XON-XOFF, RTS/CTS).
• If your communications package’s file transfer
protocol is used, and the package supports RTS/CTS
Flow control, set Flow=RTS/CTS (AT FL3). If the
*
package does not support RTS/CTS flow control, set
Flow=Off (AT FL0).
*
Check that the modem’s DTE
rate, parity, and character length
match the DTE’s settings.
If they do not match, adjust as necessary.
If in normal mode, check line
quality:
• Check CQMS parameters
(signal quality and error
probability).
• Run a remote digital
loopback (RDL) or RDL
with pattern test.
If no errors occur, the line is good.
If errors occur, perform a manual retrain, or retry the
phone call.
• If you are still receiving
errors, disconnect the
If the LAL or LAL with pattern test fails, contact Telenet-
ics Customer Support or your local distributor.
modem from the line and
perform a local analog
loopback (LAL) or LAL
with pattern test (with
modem flow control off).
If the LAL or LAL with pattern test passes, you may have
a line problem (contact your telephone company) or a
problem with your application (check with your software
vendor).
Data stops passing
Modem could be in “flow off”
condition (modem set for XON-
XOFF and DTE set for hardware
flow control).
• Set the modem for hardware flow control.
• Set Flow=Off (AT FL0).
*
The modem connects at Check CQMS parameters for
Line quality is not sufficient to support higher data rate. If
line quality improves, the modem will increase its speed
automatically.
a lower rate than the
maximum (as set in the
line quality.
Max Rate (AT MX)
*
option)
Ensure that the remote modem
supports the DCE rates you
anticipate.
Excessive modem
retrains
Retry call.
Continuous retrains indicate a line problem. Contact your
telephone company.
6-6 Troubleshooting Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)
Problem
Diagnosis/Test
Possible Solution
CALL
TERMINATION
Modem takes too long to Check to see if remote modem
If remote modem doesn't support PSTN cleardown, try to
disconnect
supports PSTN cleardown.
change the setting of DCD Loss Disconnect (AT CD)
to a smaller number.
*
Modem doesn't
disconnect when DTR
drops, or
Check modem’s DTR option for
correct setting.
• Set DTR to an option other than High.
• Set DTR=Discon (AT&D2).
Modem doesn’t
disconnect when
communications
software package does
Communications
Check the delay between issuing Ensure the escape sequence (+++) complies with the
software package won't the escape sequence (+++) and modem’s guard time requirements (refer to Line feed
signal the modem to
return to command state
when escape sequence
(+++) is issued
the ATH command.
character:S-Register 4 for details).
Check whether the modem is set Set ACU Select=AT (ACU OPT's menu).
for AT ACU.
FILE TRANSFER
Can't transfer all of a
file or a file aborts in
the middle of transfer
Check the modem’s flow control Ensure that the DTE's flow control is the same as the
settings.
modem’s setting (for example XON-XOFF, RTS/CTS).
Check whether your
If your communications software supports speed
communications package
supports speed conversion.
conversion, set modem’s Speed Conver=On (AT SC1).
*
It takes longer than
expected to transfer a
file
Confirm which file transfer
protocol you are using.
Use different protocol, for example, YMODEM,
Y-GMODEM.
If operating the 326X-SDC modem in SDC mode, and you experience this type of problem...
BER tests do not work
BER tests do not work in SDC
mode because data is not framed.
Modem won’t pass data Ensure your DTE protocol is
If your protocol is not HDLC/SDLC-like, use direct
mode.
HDLC/SDLC-like data.
Check for data format mismatch Set data format option to match the DTE [NRZ
between modem and DTE
(AT DF0) or NRZI (AT DF1)].
*
*
(AT DF).
*
Check clocking requirements.
Set modem for internal or external clock as required by
your application.
Troubleshooting Guide 6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)
Problem
Diagnosis/Test
Possible Solution
Check whether modem is set for If your DTE cannot handle Tx clock stopping, set
Flow=Tx Clk (AT FL5).
Flow=Off (AT FL0) or use CTS flow control.
*
*
Check if TpDlyMin=Rx Clk
If your DTE equipment cannot handle Rx clock stopping,
(AT TD1).
set TpDlyMin=Off (AT TD0) or set TpDlyMin=RxD
*
*
Dly (AT TD2).
*
If both modems are 326X-SDC, If the option sets are not the same, select the same option
check to ensure option sets are
the same in both modems.
sets in both modems using Select Options (ATZ)
command.
Check if one of your modems
If the local or remote modem is a 326X-SDC modem, set
(local or remote) is a 326X-SDC Fast Call=Off (AT FC0) in it.
*
unit.
Poor throughput
performance
Check your applications proto-
col:
• If a window size of one is
used (half duplex
protocol)...
Increase window size.
• If using Novell IPX...
Ensure burst mode is selected.
Check whether TpDlyMin=Off If your DTE can handle Rx clock stopping, set
(AT TD0) or TpD-
lyMin=RxD Dly (AT TD2).
TpDlyMin=Rx Clk.
*
*
Check if modem is set for
If your DTE can handle Tx clock stopping, set Flow=Tx
Flow=Off (AT FL0).
Clk (AT FL5). If it does not support Tx clock stopping,
use CTS.
*
*
If performance is not satisfac-
The optimum frame size for most applications is between
tory, experiment with frame and 128 and 1024 bytes.
window sizes.
The optimum window size for most applications is 7 to 4.
If link utilization is low
(as shown in the front panel
throughput and link utilization
status display)...
Increase the DTE rate.
Poor throughput delay
Check the setting of the flow
control option.
Use Tx clock or CTS for flow control and Rx clock for
throughput minimization delay.
6-8 Troubleshooting Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Troubleshooting Guide (Continued)
Problem Diagnosis/Test Possible Solution
If operating the 326X Series Modem on a leased line, and you experience this type of problem...
Modem won't connect
Check leased line cable for
conformance to 2- or 4-wire
pinouts (U.S./Canada only).
• For a 3261 2-wire leased line cable, pinouts should
be Pin 1 (ring) and Pin 2 (tip)
NOTE: CQMS
parameters are only
valid once the modems
are connected (in data
mode)
• For a 3261 4-wire leased line cable, pinouts should
be:
— Pins 1 (TX Ring) and 2 (TX Tip)
— Pins 7 (RX Tip) and 8 (RX Ring)
For pinouts for your country and model, refer to
Appendix C.
• Confirm the Tx and Rx connections for your leased
line jack.
Ensure one modem is set for
answer and one for originate.
Ensure modem is set to match
line type (2- or 4-wire).
If you are still experiencing
problems, run an LAL pattern
test on both modems.
• If errors are found on either end, contact Telenetics
Customer Support or your local distributor.
• If the LAL pattern test passes, you may have line
problems; contact your telephone company.
Check the modulation
configuration:
Ensure the local and remote modem’s modulation modes
are compatible with the maximum and minimum rate
options.
• Mode (AT CA)
*
• Max Rate (AT MX)
*
• Min Rate (AT MN)
*
Check the leased line transmit
If this setting is adjustable in your country, adjust
level option in both the local and transmit level to approximately -15 dB.
remote modems (LL TX Level,
TELCO OPTS).
Troubleshooting Guide 6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
326X Series Modem Diagnostic Tests
The modem supports loopback, busy out, and retrain tests to assist you in isolating
network problems. These tests analyze the telephone line and the local and remote
modem’s performance. These tests can be initiated from the modem’s front panel,
using AT commands from an attached PC or terminal, or from a network
management system.
The following table shows the AT commands to initiate and terminate tests. The
steps following the table describe how to initiate and terminate each test from the
front panel. (Refer to your network management system documentation for
instructions on initiating and terminating tests from the network management
system.)
IMPORTANT: The tests described in this section cannot be run simultaneously.
Because each test interrupts data flow in a network, notify equipment users at both
the local and remote sites before starting tests.
For details on tests, refer to Chapter 4 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
AT
Command
Test
Description
Local Analog
Loopback
Tests the local modem’s transmit and receive circuits
by looping local DTE data from the modem’s
transmitter to its receiver.
&T1
Local Analog
Loopback Pattern
Tests the local modem’s transmit and receive circuits
with an internally generated test pattern.
&T8
&T6
Remote Digital
Loopback
Using local DTE data, this test examines the transmit
and receive circuits of the local and remote modems
and the telephone line.
Remote Digital
Loopback Pattern
Tests the transmit and receive circuits of the local and &T7
remote modems and the telephone line.
Data Mode Pattern The modem uses internally generated test patterns to
provide data and separately test the inbound and
Not
applicable
outbound halves of the transmission path.
Local Digital
Loopback
Using the remote DTE data for the test, the telephone &T3
lines and the remote modem circuits are tested.
Allows the modem to appear busy to incoming calls.
Lets you manually retrain local and remote modems.
Terminates any test in progress.
Busy Out
Retrain
H1
O1
(Terminate)
&T0
6-10 Troubleshooting Guide
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Initiating and Terminating Tests from the Modem’s Front Panel
To initiate a test from the modem’s front panel:
1) Press
2) Press
3) Press
4) Press
until you reach the TEST OPTS category.
until you reach Test=End Test.
until Test=LAL (for example)
to start the test.
To terminate a test from the modem’s front panel:
1) Press
until Test=End Test.
2) Press
to stop the test.
Synchronous Data Compression (SDC) Testing
When performing diagnostic tests in SDC mode, note the following:
• All tests are supported
• When initiating the following “online” tests:
— Remote digital loopback
— Remote digital loopback pattern
— Data mode pattern
— Local digital loopback
during SDC connection, the modem falls back to Direct mode (Mode=Direct,
AT SM) to run the test. If the modem is set for internal timing
*
(Clock=Internal, AT&X) the DTE clock is changed to match the DCE rate. If
the modem is set for external timing (Clock=External, AT&X), the clock rate
provided may not match the DCE rate and the test will not function. (Set
Clock=Internal temporarily to complete testing, and then reset to External.)
• To test the synchronous data path’s integrity while running loopback tests, set
the modem for one of the asynchronous buffered modes (Mode=Normal,
Reliable, Auto Reliable, or Speed Auto Reliable).
Troubleshooting Guide 6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A
Configuration Quick Reference
Contents
Performing Numeric Entry ...........................................................................
Configuration Quick Reference A-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuration Quick-Reference—Menu Trees
This appendix contains information useful for configuring and operating the modem:
• Configuration options and functions:
panel options. Parameters whose options are restricted due to country
requirements are shaded gray.
These options are organized by the main menu in which they appear.
and AT, AT&, AT command equivalents, and default settings. (The Reference
*
Card shows the menu tree as well.)
• Numeric entry information: how to use the front panel control keys to change
numeric values of configuration settings.
• S-Registers, cross-referenced to AT Commands and front panel options.
• Dial modifiers
• Result codes: numeric (short form) and word (long form)
• Instructions for configuring Dual In-line Package (DIP) switches, which let
you override configuration settings normally selected through AT commands or
the front panel.
For More Detail
For more information on configuration, order the 326X Series Modem Reference
Guide by contacting your Telenetics sales representative or local distributor.
Audience and Assumptions
This chapter assumes you understand AT command syntax and use. (To review, refer
This chapter assumes you understand how to use the front panel to navigate the
configuration menus, and how to alter configuration options. (To review, refer to
A-2 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATI
AT&V
AT&V
ATDS
AT ST
ATZ
AT&W
AT&Y
AT&F
AT DS
AT ND
AT ST
*
*
*
*
PhaseJitter=0dg
Frq Offset=0Hz
Tx Level=0dbm
Rx Level=-0dbm
Retrains 0
Select Options=1
Save Changes=1
Power Up In=Old (D)
DTE (Rate) EC Mode
EC=(Mode)DC=(Mode)
Tx Kb 0%
Reinit Memory?
Dial From#=1
Rx = nnnn
View Phone#=1
Data (DCE Rate) T/D?
:2
:3
:4
:2
:1
:n
:9
Tx = mmmm
:n
:9
Pressing
at this
:3
:4
:2
:3
:4
display toggles modem
between talk/data
Rx Kb 0%
states
DCD RTS CTS
DSR DTR
Echo Delay=0ms
Far Echo Lvl=0
Nr Echo Lvl=0
Phase Roll=0
AT&Z
AOP DLP ALP
DR=0 TI=0 O D
Display Modem ID
(s/w rev lvl)
AT DR
ATS
S-Reg nnn=xxx
AT CN
AT LN
ATD
*
*
*
Enter Then Dial
Auto Redial=Off (D)
Enter Phone#=1
Link Phone#=1
:1
:n
:n
:9
:n
Eqlzr SNR=0dB
:9
SQ=0
EP=0%
:15
AT&T
ATH
ATO
AT&T
Accept RDL=On
:Off
AT LL
*
LAL Busy Out=On
TEST=End Test
:LAL
TEST OPT'S
:Off
:RDL
:LDL
:Pattern
:LAL Pat
:RDL Pat
:Busy Out
:Retrain
AT&L
AT MM
AT AY
AT LS
AT MX
AT MN
AT AR
AT FC
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
Max Rate=14.4(S)/28.8† (A,F)
Min Rate=300 (A)
MODULATION OPT'S
Line=Dial (1,2,3,4d)
:2W Lease (4L)
:4W Lease
Auto Type=CCITT (A)
:Codex
Low Speed=Bell
:CCITT
V.34 Asym=On
:Off
Fast Call=Off (A)
:Lvl1
Mod=V.34 Auto (A,F)
:26.4†
:1200
:2400
:4800
:7200
:33.6
:V.34 Only
:1200
:28.8†
:Lvl2
:31.2
:V32bis Auto (A,S)
:Auto V32
:300
:31.2
:33.6
:Lv i3 (2,3,4L SDC)
:26.4†
:24.0†
:V32bis Only
:V32 Only
:9600 (2,3,4L SDC)
:21.6†
:12.0
:19.2†
:16.8†
:14.4 (A,S)
:12.0
:V32 Uncoded
:V22bis Only
:212 Only
:14.4
:16.8†
:19.2†
:21.6†
:24.0†
:103 Only
:9600
:V21 Only
:7200
:4800
:2400
AT AP
AT CA
AT&X
AT RT
ATY
AT MD
AT&G
Guard Tone=Off
:550
*
*
*
*
PSTN=On (A)
:Off
AdaptiveRate=On (A)
Retrain=High BER
:Off
Mode=Originate (1,3)
:Answer (2,4)
:External
Clock=Internal (A)
:External (2 SDC)
:Loopback
Longspace=Off (A)
:On
:Off
:Low BER
:1800
:Auto A in O
AT RE
AT DI
AT LE
AT HD
AT AS
*
*
*
*
*
LtoD=Low/Fast (A)
:Low/Slow
D to L=Manual (1,2,3,4d)
Hold Dialine=Off (A)
Ans Rest=LL Fail (A)
:Always
RESTORAL OPT'S
Restore=Off (1,2,3,4d)
:1 min
:15 min
:30 min
:1 hour
:2 hour
:4 hour
:FP Only
:2 min
:High/Fast
:FP/108.1
:3 min
:High/Slow
:FP/116
:4 min
:FP/Auto (4L)
:FP/108.ACU
:FP/116.ACU
:5 min (4L SDC)
KEY
= Option Included
= Country Specific
in Option Sets
Option
=
=
=
=
(A)
(D)
Default for All Option Sets
Note:
Default for Options Not Included in Option Sets
Default for Option Set =1-4)
Option Set Default for 3261, 3263, 3266, 3268 Modems
When you select Modulation Mode
(AT*MM), you must ensure that the
Max Rate (AT*MX) and Min Rate
(AT*MR) parameter options are within
the valid range for the mode.
(1-4)
(L)
n
(n
(d) = Option Set Default for 3260, 3262, 3265, 3267 Modems
(S) = Default for 326X V.32bis Modem
(F) = Default for 326XFAST Modem
(†) = Available with 326XFAST Only
(SDC)
=
Sync Data Compression (available for 326XFAST-SDC only)
For example, inthe Min Rate (AT MN) option,
*
:9600 (2,3,4L SDC) means 9600 is the default for option sets
2, 3 and 4L (models 3261FAST, 3263FAST, 3266FAST
and 3268FAST
)
with the Sync Data Compression product.
Otherwise, the default is 300 bps for all option sets.
Figure A-1. The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure - Part 1 of 4
Configuration Quick Reference A-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT SM
AT NB
AT EC
AT DC
AT DF
*
*
*
*
AT BK
AT MF
*
*
*
EC=V.42 (A)
: LAPM
DC= Enabled (A)
:Disabled
EC/DC OPT'S
Mode=Direct (2,3,4L)
:Normal
Buffers=Regular (A)
:Reduced
Data Form=NRZ (SDC)
:NRZI
Break=Destruct (A)
:Expedited
Modem Flow=On (A)
:Off
:Reliable
:MNP
:Standard
:Auto Rel (1,4d)
(2,3,4L SDC)
:Spd AutoRel
AT DB
AT SL
*
*
Delay=Off (A)
:Buf or S38 (3 SDC)
:Buf & S38
EC ID=Default (A)
:Codex
:S38
AT& M
AT DA
AT AA
ATE
*
*
V25 Char=ASCII (A)
ACU OPT'S
AT Form=Async (A)
V25Form=Async
NoAcu Form=Async (1,4d)
:Sync (2,3,4L)
Answer=Manual
:Ring #1
Async Echo=On (A)
:Off
Char Length=8
ACU Select=AT (1)
:V25b(3)
Default Dial=Off (1,2,3,4d)
:1 (4L)
:SyncData
:DTR Dial
:Man Dial
:AsynSync
:Bitsync (A)
:Charsync
:9
:EBCDIC
:Ring #2
:10 (A)
(2,3 SDC)
:n
:LPDA2
:Ring #4
:11
:None (2,4)
:9
:Ring #8
:
Using S0
AT RP
AT MS
ATQ
ATV
AT CM
AT XC
*
*
*
*
AT Msg=Before CD (A)
:After CD
RsltCode=Enable (A)
:Disable
RsltForm=Numeric
:Verbose (A)
Rel Msg=Off (A)
:Short
LPDA2 Addr=FF
Parity=V.25bis
:Even
Con Msg=DTE Rate (D)
:DCE Rx
Sync Idle=Mark
V25 Resp=V25bis
:Char (A)
:V25rate
:Odd
:DCE Tx
:Orig
: Long
:VALOnly
:None
:Mark
:Space
ATX
LPDA2 ID=326X
:7855
LPDA2 Det=Enab
:Disab
Call Progress = 4
:1
:2
:3
:4
KEY
= Option Included
= Country Specific
in Option Sets
Option
=
=
=
=
(A)
(D)
Default for All Option Sets
Default for Options Not Included in Option Sets
Default for Option Set =1-4)
Option Set Default for 3261, 3263, 3266, 3268 Modems
(1-4)
(L)
n
(n
(d) = Option Set Default for 3260, 3262, 3265, 3267 Modems
(S) = Default for 326X V.32bis Modem
(F) = Default for 326XFAST Modem
(†) = Available with 326XFAST Only
(SDC)
=
Sync Data Compression (available for 326XFAST-SDC only)
For example, in the Min Rate (AT MN) option,
*
:9600 (2,3,4L SDC) means 9600 is the default for option sets
2, 3 and 4L (models 3261FAST, 3263FAST, 3266FAST
and 3268FAST) with the Sync Data Compression product.
Otherwise, the default is 300 bps for all option sets.
Figure A-2. The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure - Part 2 of 4
A-4 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT&R
AT DE
AT CT
AT FL
AT TD
AT SC
AT&D
AT RS
*
*
*
*
*
*
Speed Conver=On (A)
:Off
DTE Rate=Auto (1)
:128.0†
Flow=Off
TpDlyMin=Rx Clk (2,3,4L SDC)
DTR=High (1,4L)
:Escape
RTS=High (1)
TERMINAL OPT'S
CTS=High
:XON/XOFF (A)
:DTR/CTS
:Normal (2,3,4)
:Remote
:Normal (2,3,4)
:ACU On
:RxD Dly
:Off
115.2†
:Discon (4d)
:Reset
:RTS/CTS
:96.0†
:AsyncSync (1)
(Displayed only for
326XFAST -SDC products)
:XON/XOFF PT
:Tx Clk (2,3,4L SDC)
:76.8†
:RTS
:Tail (2 SDC)
:108.1 (3 SDC)
:108.2/Bsy (2,3)
:72.0†
:64.0† (2,3,4L SDC)
:57.6
:56.0† (2,3,4L SDC)
AT&S
(U.S.A/Can. only)
:48.0†
AT CD
AT MR
AT OS
AT DL
AT&C
AT SR
*
*
*
*
*
:38.4
DCD Loss Dis=Off
DSR=High (1)
Rts/Cts Delay=0 (A)
Overspeed=1% (A)
:2.5%
DCD=High (1)
:Normal (2,3,4)
RemRTS/DCD=Codex (A)
:3s
:Normal (3,4d L)
:28.8†
:15
:60
:V.13
:7s
(2 SDC)
:DTR
:26.4†
:ACU On
:Remote
:Wink
:S10
:24.0† (2,3,4L,F)
:21.6†
:90
:Drop On Disc (2)
:Simulate LL
:S26
:19.2 (4d)
:16.8
:14.4 (2,3,4L,S)
:12.0
AT DT
AT LD
AT LA
AT LT
AT OP
AT OC
AT SI
*
*
DTE Ct 140=Off (D)
:On
*
*
*
*
*
:9600
Inactivity=Off
:3min
Ext Select=Off (D)
:1H/2L
DTE Ct 141=Off (D)
DTE Pin 25=Busy
:Test
Ext Cntrl=Pin 20
:Pin 14
DTR Delay=S25 (A)
:7200
:On
:10 sec
:4800
:10min
:1H/3L
:15 sec
:2400
:20min
:1H/4L
:1200
:30min
:2H/1L
:300
:S30min
:2H/3L
:2H/4L
:3H/1L
:3H/2L
:3H/4L
:4H/1L
:4H/2L
:4H/3L
Figure A-3. The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure - Part 3 of 4
Configuration Quick Reference A-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AT &J
AT LC
ATM
ATL
AT NC
*
*
TELCO OPT'S
Telco=RJ11C
:RJ45S
DL TX Level=0
:-1
LL TX Level=0
:-1
Line Compen=Off
:On
Speaker=Dialing (D)
Netwrk Comp=Off (D)
Volume=Medium (D)
:Loud
:On
:Lvl1
:Lvl2
: -n
: -n
:RJ16C
:Security
:Off
:Soft
: -15
: -15
:RJ4MB
ATP
ATT
AT DP
AT DD
AT TT
AT BD
AT&P
AT TL
AT PT
*
*
*
*
*
*
Call Timeout=30
Blind Dial=2
Pulse Cycle=40%
:33%
DIALING OPT'S
Dial=Tone
:Pulse
Tone Length=72
Pause Delay=3
:6
Dial Wait=2
:4
:45
:4
:6
:S11
:S6
:9
:60
:38%
:Auto
:12
:S8
:90
:S7
:180
:S7
AT PN
AT PE
AT PF
AT PW
*
*
*
*
Password=Disable (D)
:Enable
FP SECURITY
Enter Password?
Set Protection?
Change Password?
AT ZV
AT ZC
AT ZR
AT ZI
AT ZP
AT ZS
AT ZD
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
ACCESS SECURITY
Enter Group PW?
PW Verify = Dis (D)
:Intern
Callback=Off (D)
:Intern 1
Rmt Num Rqrd=Off
:On
Group PW=Disable
Tone=None (D)
:Prompt Only
:Ack Only
Sim Ring=Disable (D)
:Enable
DialRstrct=Off (A)
:LV11
:Enable
:Intern n
:Mngr
:LV12
:Intern 9
:Prompt/Ack
:Remote
:Manager
:Rmt Ind
NC Port Rate=75 (D)
NC Line Disc=Off
:On
NETWK CNTL OPT'S
OverrideMode=Off (D)
:On
NC Address=000
Pass Thru=opt 1
:opt 2
:110
:150
:1200
:2400
:4800
:9600
KEY
= Option Included
= Country Specific
in Option Sets
Option
AT RC
AT RA
*
*
=
=
=
=
(A)
(D)
Default for All Option Sets
Init Rmt Cnfg?
RmtAcc=Enable (D)
:Disable
RMT CONFIG OPT'S
SET RMT LL ADDR
Default for Options Not Included in Option Sets
Default for Option Set =1-4)
Option Set Default for 3261, 3263, 3266, 3268 Modems
(1-4)
(L)
n
(n
RmtNest Modem=No
'Enter' to Set
Rmt Ser#=nnnnnnn
New Address=nnn
:A
:B
(d) = Option Set Default for 3260, 3262, 3265, 3267 Modems
RmtNest Modem=No
SRCH RMT LL ADDR
'Enter' to Search
Rmt Ser#=nnnnnnn
(S) = Default for 326X V.32bis Modem
:A
:B
=
(F)
Default for 326XFAST Modem
(†) = Available with 326XFAST Only
(SDC)
=
Sync Data Compression (available for 326XFAST-SDC only)
For example, in the Min Rate (AT MN) option,
*
:9600 (2,3,4L SDC) means 9600 is the default for option sets
2, 3 and 4L (models 3261FAST, 3263FAST, 3266FAST
and 3268FAST
)
with the Sync Data Compression product.
Otherwise, the default is 300 bps for all option sets.
Figure A-4. The 326X Series Modem Menu Structure - Part 4 of 4
A-6 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Optio n s
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
+++
—
Escape Data Mode
Enter command mode (does not require AT prefix or <CR>. The character is determined by the
content of S-Register 2.
A/
—
Re-Execute Last Command
Re-executes the last AT command string issued to the modem, including redialing a telephone
number. (Does not require AT prefix or <CR>.) The modem has a redial security feature. See
the AT ZD command for details.
*
AT=x
—
Change S-Register Value (x=new value)
Lets you change the setting of the S-Register that was last accessed with an S-Register
command.
AT?
AT
—
—
—
Display S-Register Value
Displays the contents of the last S-Register accessed.
Attention Code
Precedes all commands except (+++) and A/.
Manual Answer
ATA
ATDn
Causes the modem to answer a call regardless of the ring count.
Enter Then Dial Dialing an Unstored Telephone Number (n=phone number)
Lets you dial a telephone number of up to 50 characters without storing it in the modem’s
telephone book.
To dial a number usingAT commands, enterATD, followed by the telephone number and a
carriage return. Example: ATD5551234<CR>
ATDSn,
Dial From
Dialing a Stored Telephone number (n=1-9)
Stored #=n
ATDS=n, or
Dial telephone number stored in address n. Before using this option, enter a telephone number
into the modem address book. See AT&Z, AT CN to learn how to enter telephone numbers.
If you enter ATDS or ATDS= without a number following, the modem dials the number in
Address 1.
AT DSn,
*
*
AT DS=n
*
To dial a number usingAT Commands, enterATDS,ATDS=, orAT
telephone book address number and a carriage return. For example:ATDS2<CR>
DS followed by the
*
NOTE: You can include dial modifiers to instruct the modem how and when to dial a call. The
Async Echo
=Off
Asynchronous Echo
ATE0
ATE1
The modem does not echo asynchronous commands to the DTE.
The modem echoes asynchronous commands to the DTE.
Busy Out Test
=On
TEST
ATH0
ATH1
=End Test
If busy out is enabled,ATH0 disconnects the busy out condition. In “escape mode” (modem
has transitioned to command state from data state), ATH0 disconnects the modem.
=Busy Out
Makes the modem appear busy to incoming calls.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
ATIn
—
Display Software Information (n= 0, 1, 2, 9)
0=displays 960
1=displays 000
2=displays OK
9=displays reason for last disconnect
These messages are sent with OK, when AT command processing is complete.
Speaker Volume
Volume
=Soft
ATL0/ATL1
ATL2
The speaker volume is set to soft.
=Medium
=Loud
The speaker volume is set to medium.
ATL3
The speaker volume is set to loud.
Speaker
=Off
Speaker Control
ATM0
ATM1
ATM2
ATM3
The speaker is always off.
=Dialing
=On
The speaker is on when dialing and training, and off when the modem enters data mode.
The speaker is always on.
=Security
The speaker is on when dialing is complete and off when the modem enters data mode.
Retrain
ATO0
ATO1
—
The modem leaves command mode and returns online (to data mode).
TEST=Retrain
The modem leaves command mode, returns online, and initiates a retrain with the remote
modem.
Dial
Dial Type
ATP
=Pulse
RsltCode
=Enable
=Disable
=Orig
The modem uses pulse dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P modifiers.
Result Codes
ATQ0
ATQ1
ATQ2
Result codes are displayed at the DTE.
Result codes are not displayed at the DTE.
Result codes are output to the DTE only when operating as an originate modem.
S-Register
S-Regxxx
=nnn
ATS
Lets you view and set S-Registers (where xxx equals the S-Register to change and nnn equals
description of S-Registers).
Dial
Dial Type
ATT
=Tone
The modem uses tone dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P modifiers.
Result Code Format
RsltForm
=Numeric
=Verbose
Call Progress
ATV0
ATV1
Result codes are sent to your DTE as numbers (short form).
Result codes are sent to your DTE as full words (long form).
Call Progress
Determines whether the modem waits for call progress signals or blind dials when establishing
calls.
ATX0
ATX1
=0
=1
The modem uses only NO CARRIER and CONNECT result codes.
The modem uses only NO CARRIER, CONNECT, and CONNECT <Rate> result codes.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-8 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
ATX2
ATX3
ATX4
=2
=3
=4
The modem waits for dial tone and uses only NO CARRIER, CONNECT, CONNECT <Rate>
and NO DIALTONE result codes.
The modem detects busy signal and uses NO CARRIER, CONNECT, CONNECT <Rate>, and
BUSY result codes.
The modem waits for dial tone and detects busy signal. Only NO CARRIER, CONNECT,
CONNECT <Rate>, BUSY, and NO DIAL TONE result codes are used.
Longspace
Longspace Disconnect
ATY0
ATY1
=Off
The modem does not disconnect when it receives space longer than 1.6 seconds. When
terminating a call, the modem does not send continuous space for 4 seconds.
=On
The modem disconnects when it receives space longer than 1.6 seconds. When terminating a
call, the modem sends continuous space for 4 seconds.
Select Options
Selecting an Option Set
The new option set takes effect immediately.
The modem uses Option Set 1.
The modem uses Option Set 2.
The modem uses Option Set 3.
ATZ0/ATZ1
ATZ2
=1
=2
=3
=4
ATZ3
ATZ4
The modem uses Option Set 4. NOTE: The modem disconnects from the line when ATZ is
entered. Any test in progress is terminated. Since anyAT command that followsATZ is
ignored by the modem, ensure that ATZ is the last command entered in a command string. Use
the AT&Y command to select the option set in which the modem powers up.
DCD
DCD Control
Determines how the modem sets DCD signals. The modem signals the DTE with DCD on
EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 8 (V.24 Circuit 109).
AT&C0
AT&C1
=High
DCD is always on.
=Normal
DCD is off during dialing and while the modem is training with the remote modem. DCD is on
in data mode. It is off when the modem is disconnected from the telephone line.
AT&C2
AT&C3
=ACU On
=Remote
DCD is on when the modem is disconnected so that terminals requiring this signal can use the
ACU. During dialing, DCD goes off until both modems train and are ready to pass data. DCD
is on in data mode. DCD drops on a disconnect momentarily.
This setting applies to simulated half-duplex applications and works only if the remote modem
also supports RTS/DCD signaling. When the remote DTE turns RTS on, DCD is forced on at
the local modem. The local modem can receive data only during this period. Once the remote
DTE drops RTS, DCD at the local modem follows. The Rem RTS/DCD option lets you choose
the type of RTS/DCD signaling.
AT&C4
=Wink
DCD is always on; however, it drops after disconnect and remains low momentarily.
DTR
DTR Control
This command determines how the modem interprets the DTR signal. The local DTE uses
DTR (Pin 20) to signal the modem.
AT&D0
AT&D1
=High
The modem ignores DTR from the DTE. The modem reads DTR as always high. Choose this
option for DTR/CTS flow control with error correction, or if the DTE does not provide DTR
signal.
=Escape
When ACU Select=AT and AT Form=Async (AT&M), the modem enters the AT Escape mode
(+++) when DTR goes off while the modem is in data or test mode.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT&D2
=Discon
The modem hangs up and enters command mode when an on-to-off DTR transition is detected,
while the modem is in data, test, or escape mode. If DTR is low, the modem does not auto
answer.
AT&D3
AT&D4
=Reset
=Tail
The modem hangs up (if connected) and loads the specified option set when an on-to-off DTR
transition occurs. If DTR is low, the modem auto answers.
This setting is similar to 108.1 except that the modem auto answers an incoming call even if
DTR is off. When DTR transitions from off to on, the modem connects to the telephone line
and dials (if the Default Dial option is enabled).
AT&D5
AT&D6
=108.1
=108.2
The DTR signal emulates the function of the Talk/Data (
at the Home position) key on the
modem’s front panel. An off-to-on DTR transition instructs the modem to connect to the
telephone line. If the modem detects an incoming ring, it answers the call. If the modem does
not detect an incoming call, the modem dials the number specified by the Default Dial option.
An on-to-off DTR transition disconnects the modem from the telephone line.
When the modem is disconnected from the telephone line, and DTR is turned on by the DTE,
the modem responds to all AT commands. When the DTE turns DTR off, the modem does not
respond to dialing and answering AT commands, but responds to all other AT commands. The
DTR signal must remain on throughout the connection. An on-to-off DTR transition
disconnects the modem from the telephone line. If DTE is low, the modem does not auto
answer.
AT&D7
=108.2/Bsy
When the modem is disconnected from the telephone line, and the DTE asserts DTR, the
modem responds to all AT commands. The DTR signal must remain asserted throughout the
connection.
When the DTE de-asserts DTR:
• The modem disconnects from the telephone line. If DTR is de-asserted, the
modem activates Busyout status.
• The modem does not respond to dialing and answering commands, but responds
to all other commands.
Reinitialize Memory
AT&F
Reinit Memory? Resets the modem to factory default settings. The four factory default option sets are restored
to their original settings, and all stored telephone numbers are deleted.
Enter: AT&F<CR>. The modem displays 326x Initial and the terminal displays OK.
The factory-programmed option sets are now in place.
Guard Tone
Guard Tone
This command determines what type of guard tone the modem uses inV.22bis operation. The
proper guard tone (AT&G) option setting is required by your PTT.
AT&G0
AT&G1
AT&G2
=Off
The modem does not use a guard tone.
The modem uses a guard tone of 550 Hz.
The modem uses a guard tone of 1800 Hz.
Display Modem ID
=550
=1800
AT&I0
AT&I1
AT&I2
Modem ID# 1
Modem ID# 1
Modem ID# 1
Software part number.
Factory product code.
Country code
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-10 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT&I3
AT&I4
AT&I5
Modem ID# 1
Modem ID# 1
Modem ID# 1
Telco
Product code
Network control address (optional)
Device serial number
Dial Line Jack Type
AT&J0/
AT&J1
=RJ11C
This 6-pin modular jack type is the most common permissive data mode (voice) jack
arrangement found in the home or office and operates on a single-line bridged tip-and-ring
voice or low-speed data application service.
AT&J2
=RJ45S
This 8-pin modular jack type is the most common programmable jack arrangement and permits
the use of an exclusion key telephone. This jack also operates on a single-line bridged tip-and-
ring voice or low-speed data application service.
NOTE: When installing the modem in a PBX environment, the interface to the PBX should be
a voice grade jack (RJ11). Although an RJ11 jack is installed, Telenetics recommends that
Telco=RJ45S. This optimizes modem performance the when operating at high data rates over a
PBX. In a normal Telco-supplied loop situation, the telco options setting should match the jack
type installed.
AT&J3
AT&J4
=RJ16CS
=RJ4MB
This 6-pin modular jack type is a special permissive data mode jack arrangement that allows
use of an exclusion key telephone.
This 8-pin modular programmable data mode jack arrangement supports Make Busy operation.
Using this jack type, you can make the modem appear to be off-hook to the central telephone
office. Note: In modems in the U. S. A. and Canada, the Make Busy function operates only in
nest card modems. (Make Busy settings display in standalone modems, but are not active.)
Line
Line Type
AT&L0
AT&L1
=Dial
The modem communicates over dial lines in dial applications only.
=2W Lease
The modem communicates over a 2-wire leased line. The ACUs (AT and V.25bis) are not
functional when the modem is connected to a leased line.
AT&L2
=4W Lease
The modem communicates over a 4-wire leased line. The ACUs (AT and V.25bis) are not
functional when the modem is connected to a leased line.
AT Form
AT Data Format
Determines the format of the data when ACU Select is set toAT.
The modem communicates asynchronously in command and data mode.
AT&M0
AT&M1
=Async
=Sync Data
The modem communicates asynchronously when in command mode (disconnected from the
dial line), and synchronously when in data mode.
AT&M2
=DTR Dial
=Man Dial
When an off-to-on DTR transition is detected, the modem dials the number stored in the
memory location designated by the Default Dial option. Once connected, the modems transmit
data synchronously. If DTR transitions from on-to-off, the modem hangs up and returns to the
asynchronous command mode.
AT&M3
DTR signals toggle between talk and data mode. With DTR off, numbers can be dialed from a
telephone. Once an answer tone is heard, the telephone is hung up, and DTR is raised; the
modems connect and send data sychronously.
Pulse Cycle
=40%
Pulse Cycle
AT&P0
AT&P1
AT&P2
The make/break ratio is 40:60.
The make/break ratio is 33.5:66.5.
The make/break ratio is 38.5:61.5.
=33%
=38%
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
CTS
CTS Control
Determines how the modem sets the CTS signal. The modem signals the DTE with CTS on
EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 5 (V.24 Circuit 106). The CTS Signal discussed here is the state of the
CTS signal after the setting of the modem’sRTS option has been followed. For CTS to follow
the RTS signal from the DTE, set the modem RTS= Normal.
AT&R0/
=AsyncSync
CTS is on in asynchronous mode. CTS is off in synchronous, ACU mode. If the data transfer
mode is synchronous, CTS is off during training/retraining and follows RTS in data mode.
When CTS follows RTS in data mode, the setting of theRTS/CTS Delay option applies (if
Mode=Direct).
AT CT3
*
AT&R1/
CTS=High
CTS remains high at all times. Use this option with RTS/CTS or DTR/CTS Flow control.
AT CT0
*
DSR
DSR Control
Determines how the modem sets the DSR signal. The modem signals the DTE with DSR on
EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 6 (V.24 Circuit 107).
AT&S0
AT&S1
=High
DSR is always on.
=Normal
TEST
DSR is controlled by the modem.
Test
AT&T0
AT&T1
AT&T3
=End Test
=LAL
Ends the test currently in progress for each test listed below (except retrain).
Initiates a local analog loopback test.
Initiates a local digital loopback test.
Accept RDL
=LDL
Accept RDL
=On
AT&T4
AT&T5
AT&T6
AT&T7
AT&T8
The local modem can be put into a remote digital loopback test.
The local modem cannot be put into a remote digital loopback test.
Initiates a remote digital loopback test.
=Off
TEST=RDL
TEST=RDL Pat Initiates a remote digital loopback pattern test.
TEST=LAL Pat Initiates a local analog loopback pattern test.
Status
Modem Status Display
AT&V0
Long Form
Status
Lets you view modem status information, on the control terminal, in long form. The display
shows operating status, DTE/DCE rate/status, asymmetric rates status, connect message status,
the data form, throughput-delay minimization status, error correction status, data compression
status, EIA/TIA signal status, disconnect reasons, the software revision level, and CQMS
parameters. The long form also shows front panel options and corresponding AT commands.
AT&V1
Short Form
Status
Lets you view modem status information, on the control terminal, in short form. This displays
a summary ofAT command settings and S-register values.
Save Changes
Save Changes
When using AT Commands or front panel options to alter modem settings, if you do not save
the changes, the modem does not enter them into memory. After you have selected the option
set for your application (using the ATZn Command), and modified configuration settings,
enter: AT&Wn where n=(Option Set) 1 through 4. The modem displays Saving Options, then
Save Completed! signifying that the option set has been saved in nonvolatile memory.
AT&W0/
AT&W1
=1
Save changes to Option Set 1.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-12 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT&W2
AT&W3
AT&W4
=2
Save changes to Option Set 2.
Save changes to Option Set 3.
Save changes to Option Set 4.
Clock
=3
=4
Clock
Sets modem timing and applies to synchronous applications only. For most dial applications,
use internal timing.
AT&X0
AT&X1
AT&X2
=Internal
The modem uses internal timing; timing signals are passed on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 15(V.24
circuit 114). Internal timing is used for most applications.
=External
=Loopback
The modem uses external timing; timing signals are passed on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 24(V.24
circuit 113). Internal timing is used for most applications.
The modem uses loopback timing; timing signals are passed on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 17 (V.24
circuit 115). NOTE: This selection is not available in SDC mode. If you select loopback with
SDC mode enabled, the modem uses internal timing instead.
Power Up In
Power Up In Option Set
AT&Y0
AT&Y1
AT&Y2
AT&Y3
AT&Y4
=Old
When you turn on the modem, it automatically uses the last saved option set.
When you turn on the modem, it automatically uses Option Set 1.
When you turn on the modem, it automatically uses Option Set 2.
When you turn on the modem, it automatically uses Option Set 3.
When you turn on the modem, it automatically uses Option Set 4.
Enter Telephone Numbers (where n=1-9)
=1
=2
=3
=4
Enter Phone #
AT&Zn
=1–9
Lets you store up to nine telephone numbers in the modem’s “address book” of up to 50
characters each. To enter a number into the address book: enter the AT&Z or AT CN
*
command, the telephone book address (1-9), a comma, and the telephone number to store. For
example, to store the number 1-222-555-444 in memory location 3, enter:
AT CN3,12225554444<CR>
*
If you enter AT&Z or AT CN without specifying a memory location, the modem stores the
*
number in address 1. If no telephone number follows AT&Z or AT CN, the specified memory
location’s telephone number is deleted. NOTE: When dialing telephone numbers, you can
include dial modifiers to instruct the modem how and when to dial a call. Refer to Table A-4.
*
Answer
Answer
AT AA0
*
=Manual
An incoming call must be answered manually.
AT AAl
*
Answer=Ring # The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the first ring.
1
AT AA2
=Ring # 2
=Ring # 4
=Ring # 8
=Using S0
Adaptive Rate
=Off
The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the second ring.
The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the fourth ring.
The modem automatically answers an incoming call after the eighth ring.
The modem automatically answers an incoming call according to the setting of S-Register S0.
Adaptive Rate Feature
*
AT AA3
*
AT AA4
*
AT AA5
*
AT AP0
The modem does not use the adaptive rate feature.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT AP1
=On
The modem monitors telephone line signal quality and negotiates the highest possible rate for a
*
modem’s modulation mode. You must enable Retrain (AT RT) to use the Adaptive Rate.
*
Close rear panel switch 1 down so that the modem can inform the terminal of rate changes See
information.
Adaptive Rate Operation in V.34 Modulation Mode
In the V.34 modulation mode, with Adaptive Rate=On (MODULATION OPTS Menu, or
AT AP1), the modem selects the optimum data rate on the first connection. The modem then
*
monitors line conditions, and if conditions deteriorate (i.e., poor signal quality), the modems
retrain and determine the rate that the line can support, within the range specified in Max Rate
(AT MX) and Min Rate (AT MN). Under poor line conditions, the modem may fall back by
*
*
more than one rate.
For example, at a data rate of 28.8 kbps, under poor line conditions, the modem may retrain to
19.2 kbps instead of 21.6 kbps. ARS adjustment is based on the High/Low BER setting of the
AT RT (Retrain) option.
*
NOTES:
1) The AT RT (Retrain) command must be enabled (set to Low BER or High BER)
*
if you use the adaptive rate setting.
2) The modem does not fall forward in V.34 modulation mode with ARS enabled.
Line Probing Feature Operation in V.34 Mode
The modem uses a line probing feature during the initial training sequence. Line probing
selects the maximum data rate that the line can support, as well as the optimal baud rate and
carrier frequency. Due to this, in the V.34 modulation modes (V.34 Auto and V.34 Only), the
modem may require a longer training sequence.
NOTE: For a summary of the supported data rates, baud rates and carrier frequencies, refer to
If You Operate the Modem in V.34 Mode with ARS Disabled...
If you operate the modem in the V.34 modulation mode with the ARS option disabled
(AT AP0), the modem selects the optimum data rate that can be supported (as determined by
*
the line probing feature described above) on the first connection.
With ARS disabled, the modem does not automatically fall back when line conditions
deteriorate.
NOTE: When external timing is selected, configure the modem so that the minimum rate is
equal to the maximum rate. This will force the modems to come up at a specific data rate only.
Asym Rate
V.34 Asymmetric Rate
Controls whether the modem permits different transmit and receive DCE rates.
Asymmetric Rate
AT AR0
*
=Off
AT AR1
*
=On
Ans Rest
Answer In Restoral
Controls whether the modem answers a call on the dial line while connected to the leased line.
AT AS0
=LL Fail
When connected on a leased line, the modem answers an incoming call only if the leased line
fails.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-14 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT AS1
=Always
A dial call is always answered. As soon as the dial call is answered, the leased line connection
is dropped (with auto-answering, the leased line is dropped after the correct number of rings).
If training on the dial line fails, the modem returns to the leased line.
*
Auto Type
Auto Type
AT AY0
=CCITT
During answer-back tone, the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V.32
modulation mode. As soon as answer-back tone ends, if aV.32 tone has not been detected
during ABT, the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V.22bis modulation mode.
*
AT AY1
=Codex
During answer-back tone, the modem attempts to negotiate a connection in the V.32
modulation mode. After sending answer-back tone, the modem continues to attempt to
negotiate a connection in the V.32 modulation mode. If unsuccessful, the modem tries to
negotiate a connection in the V.22bis modulation mode.
*
Blind Dial
Blind Dial
Determines the time the modem waits before dialing; once time has expired, the modem dials
without waiting for a dial tone.
AT BD0
*
=2
The modem waits 2 seconds before dialing.
The modem waits 4 seconds before dialing.
The modem waits the amount of time specified by S-Register 6 before dialing.
Break Handling
AT BD1
*
=4
AT BD2
=S6
Break
*
Controls how the modem handles the break signal in reliable and auto-reliable data modes.
Break signals are sent to the DTE for the duration specified in S-Register 97.
AT BK0
=Destruct
The modem uses destructive and expedited break handling. It passes the break to the remote
site immediately and deletes all data from its buffers. NOTE: Destructive breaks reinitialize
data compression tables for MNP-5 andV.42bis.
*
AT BK1
=Expedited
=Standard
The modem uses nondestructive and expedited break handling. It passes the break to the
remote site immediately without deleting data from its buffers.
*
AT BK2
The modem uses standard break handling. It passes the break to the remote site in sequence
with any transmit data from its buffers.
*
Mode
Answer/Originate Mode
AT CA0
*
=Orig
The modem operates as an originating modem in a manual answer/dial application.
The modem operates as an answer modem in a manual answer/dial application.
AT CA1
*
=Answer
=External
AT CA2
The signal from the DTE on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 11 determines whether the modem is in
answer or originate mode. If the signal is off, the modem is in originate mode; if the signal is
on, the modem is in answer mode
*
AT CA3
=Auto A in O
The modem configures itself as an originating modem after auto-answering a call. In leased-
line operation, the modem functions as if it is set to originate calls. NOTE: The functions
provided by this setting only apply when the modem auto-answers.
*
DCD Loss Dis
=Off
DCD Loss Disconnect
AT CD0
*
The modem will not disconnect due to loss of carrier.
The modem hangs up if it loses carrier for 3 seconds.
The modem hangs up if it loses carrier for 7 seconds.
AT CD1
*
=3 s
AT CD2
=7 s
*
AT CD3
=S10
The modem checks the value stored in S-Register 10 to determine when it disconnects due to
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
Con Msg
Connect Message
AT CM0
=DTE Rate
Selecting DTE Rate results in the current DTE rate being displayed on your terminal after the
connect message.
*
AT CM1
=DCE Rate
Selecting DCE Rate results in the current DCE rate being displayed on your terminal after the
connect message.
*
AT CN1 –
Enter Phone #
=1–9
See the AT&Z command description.
*
9,(phone no.)
AT CT0/
CTS=High
CTS is always high. Use this setting if you plan to use RTS/CTS or DTR/CTS Flow control.
*
AT&R1
AT CT1
=Normal
The modem controls CTS as in normal handshaking. In V.25bis ACU operation, CTS follows
DTR in command state; CTS is off in training/retraining and follows RTS in data mode.
*
For AT ACU operation, CTS follows RTS in command state; CTS is off in training/retraining
and follows RTS in data mode. If an ACU is not selected, CTS is low.
AT CT2
*
=ACU On
CTS is on in ACU mode, goes off during training/retraining, and follows RTS in data mode.
AT CT3/
*
=AsyncSync
CTS is on in asynchronous mode, and off in synchronous, ACU mode. In synchronous data
transfer mode, CTS is off in training/retraining and follows RTS in data mode. When CTS
follows RTS in data mode, the setting of theRTS/CTS Delay option applies (if Mode=Direct).
AT&R0
AT CT4
=RTS
CTS follows RTS. Use this setting if your application requires that CTS immediately follow
RTS. If one of these flow control methods is used: Flow=RTS/CTS or Flow=DTR/CTS, then
CTS does not follow RTS in a flow-off condition. When CTS=RTS, the RTS/CTS Delay
*
(AT DL) option is not available.
*
Default Dial
Default Dialing
AT DA0
=Off
The default dial feature is disabled.
*
AT DA1 – 9 =1 – 9
The modem direct dials the telephone number stored in the memory address selected (memory
addresses 1 – 9) when one of the following conditions occurs:
*
•DTR=108.1 orTail, and the DTE turns the DTR signal from off to on.
•DTR=108.2, Esc, Discon, Reset, or High; the DTR signal is on; and either the front panel
Talk/Data key (
at the Home position) is pressed, or control of the dial is switched to
the modem with an exclusion key telephone.
•ACU Select=AT, AT Form=DTR Dial, and the DTR signal transitions from off to on.
This option also determines the telephone number dialed during restoral.
Buffer Delay
Delay
AT DB0
*
=Off
The Off setting disables the Delay option.
AT DB1
*
=Buf or S38
This setting starts the buffer delay timer immediately upon detection of the disconnect request.
When the timer is operating, the modem continues to process either the transmit or receive
buffers. The modem disconnects when the buffers are empty or the timer expires, whichever
occurs first. NOTE: When the modem is set for Direct mode, no data buffering occurs and the
disconnect is immediate.
AT DB2
=Buf & S38
This setting prevents the timer from starting until either the transmit or receive buffers have
emptied. The modem then disconnects. Once the timer expires, when the modem is set to
Direct mode, data is not buffered and the timer starts immediately.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-16 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT DB3
=S38
This setting allows the timer to start immediately upon detection of a disconnect request. The
request continues to process either its transmit or receive buffers. The modem disconnects
when the timer expires, regardless of the buffer states. NOTE: In Direct mode, no data
buffering occurs. However, the modem delays a disconnect until the timer expires.
*
DC
Data Compression
AT DC0
*
=Disable
=Enable
Data compression is not attempted.
Data compression is attempted.
AT DC1
*
If the modem is using LAPM error correction, it uses V.42bis data compression when
DC=Enabled. NOTE: In an application with SDC enabled, LAPM error correction and
V.42bis data compression only are used.
If your modem is using MNP error correction, it attempts to negotiate V.42bis and MNP-5 data
compression with the remote modem.
Depending on which data compression type can be accommodated by the remote modem,
V.42bis or MNP-5 is used. Otherwise, no data compression is used.
Dial Wait
=2 sec
=3 sec
=4 sec
=6 sec
=12 sec
=15 sec
=20 sec
=30 sec
=40 sec
=S7
Dial Wait
AT DD0
*
The modem waits 2 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits 3 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits 4 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits 6 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits 12 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits15 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits 20 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits 30 seconds for a dial tone.
The modem waits 40 seconds for a dial tone.
DTE Rate
AT DD1
*
AT DD2
*
AT DD3
*
AT DD4
*
AT DD5
*
AT DD6
*
AT DD7
*
AT DD8
*
AT DD9
*
DTE Rate
=300
AT DE2
The DTE port is configured for 300 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 1200 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 2400 bps (this is the lowest rate available in SDC mode).
The DTE port is configured for 4800 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 7200 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 9600 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 12,000 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 14,400 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 16,800 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 19,200 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 21,600 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 24,000 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 26,400 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 28,800 bps.
The DTE port is configured for 38,400 bps.
*
AT DE4
*
=1200
=2400
=4800
=7200
=9600
=12.0
AT DE5
*
AT DE6
*
AT DE7
*
AT DE8
*
AT DE9
*
AT DE10
=14.4
*
AT DE11
=16.8
*
AT DE12
*
=19.2
AT DE13
*
=21.6
AT DE14
=24.0
*
AT DE25
=26.4
*
AT DE26
*
=28.8
AT DE15
*
=38.4
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT DE23
*
=48.0
=56.0
=57.6
=64.0
=72.0
=76.8
=96.0
=115.2
=128.0
=Auto
The DTE port is configured for 48,000 bps. Available with SDC feature only.
The DTE port is configured for 56,000 bps. Available with SDC feature only.
The DTE port is configured for 57,600 bps.
AT DE24
*
AT DE16
*
AT DE17
The DTE port is configured for 64,000 bps. Available with SDC feature only.
The DTE port is configured for 72,000 bps. Available with SDC feature only.
The DTE port is configured for 76,800 bps.
*
AT DE18
*
AT DE19
*
AT DE20
The DTE port is configured for 96,000 bps.
*
AT DE21
The DTE port is configured for 115,200 bps.
*
AT DE28
*
The DTE port is configured for 128,000 bps.
AT DE22
*
The modem uses the autobaud feature to determine the rate at which to operate. For details, see
When configured for synchronous operation, if you select Auto, the DTE will be driven at the
previous DTE rate selected (the factory default is 9600 bps).
Data Form
Data Format
Lets you specify the data encoding format to be used during SDC connections. NOTE: This
option applies only to SDC data mode. It does not apply to synchronous ACUs (V.25bis or
LPDA2) while disconnected. In the online mode, LPDA2 commands must follow the format of
this option.
AT DF0
*
=NRZ
=NRZI
L to D
The modem uses the NRZ data encoding format.
The modem uses the NRZI data encoding format.
Leased to Dial
AT DF1
*
In an automatic restoral application, the originating modem uses the setting of this command as
a trigger for automatic restoral. You select a threshold for the number of retrains to occur over
a period of time. The originating modem initiates restoral if the number is exceeded.
AT DI0
=Low/Fast
This is the most sensitive setting. It lets the modem initiate restoral when signal quality
deteriorates slightly. For V.34/V.32/V.32 Uncoded/V.32bis modulation modes, 3 retrains must
occur within 5 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established. For other modulation
modes, 6 retrains must occur within 5 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established.
*
AT DI1
=Low/Slow
=High/Fast
=High/Slow
For V.34/V.32/V.32 Uncoded/V.32bis modulation modes, 6 retrains must occur within 10
minutes before a dial restoral connection is established. For all other modulation modes, 12
retrains must occur within 10 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established.
*
AT DI2
For V.34/V.32/V.32 Uncoded/V.32bis modulation modes, 5 retrains must occur within 5 minutes
before a dial restoral connection is established. For all other modulation modes, 10 retrains
must occur within 5 minutes before a dial restoral connection is established.
*
AT DI3
For V.34/V.32/V.32 Uncoded/V.32bis modulation modes, 10 retrains must occur within 10
minutes before a dial restoral connection is established. For all other modulation modes, 20
retrains must occur within 1 minute before a dial restoral connection is established.
*
RTS/CTS Delay RTS/CTS Delay
Sets the minimum interval for the delay time between RTS and CTS. These settings apply only
when operating in the asynchronous Direct or synchronous data modes.
There is no RTS/CTS delay.
AT DL0
RTS/CTS
Delay=0
*
AT DL1
=15
15-ms delay before the modem sendsCTS to the DTE after receivingRTS from the DTE.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-18 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT DL2
*
=60
60-ms delay before the modem sendsCTS to the DTE after receivingRTS from the DTE.
90-ms delay before the modem sendsCTS to the DTE after receivingRTS from the DTE.
RTS/CTS delay is determined by the value of S-Register 26.
Pause Delay
AT DL3
*
=90
AT DL4
=S26
*
Pause Delay
Makes the modem pause when it encounters modifiers in a dial string or on the command line.
Pause delay is 3 seconds.
AT DP0
*
=3
AT DP1
*
=6
Pause delay is 6 seconds.
AT DP2
=9
Pause delay is 9 seconds.
*
AT DP3
=12
Pause delay is 12 seconds.
*
AT DP4
*
=S8
Auto Redial
Auto Redial
Determines how many times the modem redials a failed call. The modem waits for a country-
specific time between redials. If the AT LN option is enabled, the modem dials all of the
*
linked numbers before redialing.
AT DR0
*
=Off
The modem does not redial an unsuccessful call.
AT DRn
*
=n
The modem redials an unsuccessful call n times (n=1-15).
Dialing a Stored Telephone number (n=1-9)
AT DSn or
Dial From
Stored#
*
AT DS=n
See the ATDS description earlier for information on using this command.
*
=n
DTR Delay
DTR Delay
Determines how long the modem waits after connecting to the dial line before examining the
DTR signal from the DTE. If the DTR signal is low, the modem disconnects. This feature is
used when AT Form =SyncData or V25 Form=AsynSync.
AT DT0
*
=S25
The modem waits for the time specified by S-Register 25 before examining DTR.
The modem waits 10 seconds before examining DTR.
The modem waits 15 seconds before examining DTR.
Error Correction
AT DT1
*
=10 sec
=15 sec
EC
AT DT2
*
The AT EC (EC) command determines which error-correction protocol is used. NOTE: This
*
option does not apply when the modem is configured for SDC operation. If both the local and
remote modems are operating in SDC mode, LAPM error correction with V.42bis data
compression only is used; no other setting is available.
AT EC0
=V.42
The modems negotiate the use of LAPM or MNP error correction. First, the modems attempt to
negotiate using LAPM. If unsuccessful, they attempt to negotiate using MNP.
*
AT EC1
=LAPM
=MNP
The modems attempt to negotiate LAPM error correction.
The modems attempt to negotiate MNP error correction.
Fast Call
*
AT EC2
*
Fast Call
Reduces the time for selected phases of the connect sequence.
This option disables the Fast Call feature.
AT FC0
*
=Off
AT FC1
*
=Lvl1
The 2.15 second billing delay in the answer modem is eliminated. The length of time ABT is
sent is reduced by 1 second in all modulation modes except V.34.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT FC2
=Lvl2
Lvl2 applies to V.32 (coded or uncoded)/V.32bis modulation modes only. It includes the Lvl1
function and shortens training time by approximately 2 seconds.
*
AT FC3
=Lvl3
Lvl3 includes the Lvl1 and Lvl2 function and eliminates error-correction negotiation, saving
approximately an additional half second. For proper operation, enable this option and ensure
that AT SM (Mode), AT EC (Error Correction), and AT DC (Data Compression) (EC/DC
*
*
*
*
OPT’S category) are set the same in both modems.
NOTE: Selecting Lvl3 in the V.34 modulation mode bypasses error correction negotiation and
improves the connect time of the modems as described above.
If your local and remote modems are configured for SDC operation by selecting Fast Call Lvl3,
the modems use LAPM error correction with V.42bis data compression only. For proper
operation, enable this option in both modems, and ensure that the AT SM (Mode) is set the
*
same in both modems.
Flow
Flow Control
Allows the modems and DTEs in a link to control the flow of data when buffers near their
capacity. Use some type of flow control when operating in the Normal or Reliable mode.
Check the DTE’s manual to ensure that the DTE supports the type of flow control you select.
AT FL0
*
=Off
Flow control is disabled.
AT FLl
*
=XON/XOFF
The local modem and DTE operate flow control by passing characters embedded in the data
stream between them. The XOFF character signals the transmitting device to stop sending data.
The XON character lets the halted device start sending data. NOTE: XON/XOFF flow control
is not supported in SDC mode.
AT FL2
=DTR/CTS
=RTS/CTS
In asynchronous applications, the local modem and DTE use DTR/CTS signals to operate flow
control.
*
In SDC applications, DTR/CTS flow control operates the same as asynchronous applications,
except flow control is unidirectional from the local modem to the DTE through the CTS signal;
the modem uses CTS to signal when the buffers are full. The DTR signal has no impact on flow
control in synchronous applications.
AT FL3
In asynchronous applications, the local modem and DTE use RTS/CTS signals to operate flow
control. The terminal uses RTS to signal when its buffers are full. The modem uses CTS to
signal when its buffers are full. An on-to-off transition signals the transmitting device to stop
sending data; an off-to-on transition signals that data can flow.
*
In SDC applications, RTS/CTS flow control functions the same as asynchronous applications,
except flow control is unidirectional from the local modem to the DTE through the CTS signal;
the modem uses CTS to signal when the buffers are full. The RTS signal has no impact on flow
control in synchronous applications.
AT FL4
=XON/XOFF PT XON/XOFF Pass-Through Flow Control. The local modem and DTE operate flow control by
passing characters embedded in the data stream between them. Check your DTE manual to
verify if the DTE recognizes XON/XOFF flow control.
*
NOTES:
1) Pass-through flow control must be used with caution when Mode=Normal and Modem
Flow=On because XON/XOFF characters are acted on by the remote modem at its DCE port.
2) Pass-through flow control is not applicable in 326X-SDC mode. If SDC is enabled, and you
select XON/XOFF PT, the modem operates as if flow control were disabled.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-20 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT FL5
=TxClk
Transmit Clock. This option applies only in SDC mode. When the Tx Clk flow control option
is selected, the modem uses a transmit clock for flow control based on available buffer space.
The transmit clock is stopped when the buffers are full, inhibiting the flow of data from the
DTE. It is started again when buffer space is available. NOTE: This option is operational only
when internal timing has been selected (Clock=Internal, AT&X).
*
Hold DL Line
Hold Dial Line
This command forces the modem to hold a dial restoral connection while testing a leased line
connection. This command applies to modems configured for restoral.
AT HD0
=Off
The Hold Dialine option is disabled; a dial modem configured for restoral disconnects from the
dial line normally. A leased line modem configured for restoral disconnects from the dial line
as soon as it connects to the leased line.
*
AT HD1
=1min
A dial modem configured for restoral holds the dial line for 1 minute. A leased line modem
configured for restoral holds the dial line for 1 minute while testing the leased line.
*
AT HD2
=2min
*
AT HD3
*
=3min
AT HD4
*
=4min
AT HD5
=5min
*
DTE Ct. 141
DTE Circuit 141
Controls whether the local DTE can send the modem into a local analog loopback by sending a
signal on V.24 Circuit 141 (Pin 18) to the modem. The DTE must support Circuit 141 in order
to use this option.
AT LA0
*
=Off
=On
The modem does not respond to a signal on Circuit 141 (Pin 18).
AT LAl
*
An off-to-on transition on Circuit 141 (Pin 18) causes the modem to initiate a local analog
loopback test.
An on-to-off transition onV.24 Circuit 141 (Pin 18) takes the modem out of a local analog
loopback test.
Line Compen
Line Compensation
Enables the modem to compensate for the effects of low loss in the End Office-to-End Office
connections.
AT LC0
*
=Off
Disables the Line Compensation option.
Enables the Line Compensation option.
DTE Circuit 140
AT LC1
*
=On
DTE Ct. 140
Controls whether the local DTE can put the modem into a remote digital loopback by sending a
signal on V.24 Circuit 140 (Pin 21) to the modem.
AT LD0
*
=Off
=On
The modem does not respond to a signal on V.24 Circuit 140 (Pin 21).
AT LDl
*
An off-to-on transition onV.24 Circuit 140 (Pin 21) sends the modem into a remote digital
loopback test. An on-to-off transition on V.24 Circuit 140 (Pin 21) takes the modem out of a
remote digital loopback test.
D to L
Dial to Leased Option, Automatic Disconnect
Lets the modem automatically disconnect from the dial line and return to the leased line after a
specified period.
AT LE0
=Manual
Pressing the Talk/Data key (at the Home position) returns the modem to the leased line.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT LE1
*
=15 min
=30 min
=1 Hr
The modem returns to the leased line after 15 minutes.
The modem returns to the leased line after 30 minutes.
The modem returns to the leased line after 1 hour.
The modem returns to the leased line after 2 hours.
The modem returns to the leased line after 4 hours.
AT LE2
*
AT LE3
*
AT LE4
=2 Hr
*
AT LE5
*
=4 Hr
LAL Busy Out Local Analog Loopback Test Busy Out
Determines whether the modem appears busy to incoming calls during a local analog loopback
test. NOTE: Set AT&J (TELCO OPT’STelco) to RJ4MB before enabling this option.
AT LL0
=Off
=On
The modem does not busy out the line during a local analog loopback test, allowing incoming
calls to ring.
*
AT LLl
The modem connects to the line during a local analog loopback test, making the line appear
busy to incoming calls.
*
AT LNm,n
Link Phone #’s: Link Telephone Numbers
#m to #n
*
Lets you link telephone numbers stored in the modem’s telephone book. Some remote
locations provide more than one number to call in case one is busy. If a call fails and the
number is linked, the modem pauses and then calls the linked number. NOTE: With this
feature enabled, the modem dials linked numbers before redialing.
To link numbers using the AT Command, enter AT LN, followed by the memory location of
*
the number you want to link from (n), a comma, and the memory location of the number to link
(m). For example:
AT LN2,4
*
In this example, memory location 2 is linked to memory location 4.T oclear the link between
the two memory locations, enter AT LN2. Effectively, memory location 2 is now linked to no
*
memory location.
Low Speed
Low Speed
Determines which low-speed modulation mode is used when a higher (V.34, V.32bis, V.32, or
V.22bis) modulation mode connection cannot be made while Mod=V.34 Auto, V32bis Auto or
Auto V32.
AT LS0
*
=Bell
Bell 103 modulation mode is used.
V.21 modulation mode is used.
DTE Pin 25
AT LS1
*
=CCITT
DTE Pin 25
Controls whether the modem uses EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 25 as an input or an output. Set rear
AT LT0
=Busy
The DTE signals the modem on Pin 25 to make the modem appear busy to incoming calls. Set
rear panel DIP switch 2 to the off (up) position. Also, setAT&J (Telco ) to RJ4MB. NOTE: In
modems in the U. S. A. and Canada, the Make Busy function operates only in nest card
modems. (Make Busy settings display in standalone modems, but are not active.)
*
AT LTl
=Test
The modem signals the DTE on V.24 Circuit 142 (Pin 25) when a test is in progress.
*
PSTN Signaling PSTN Signaling
Determines how the modem handles disconnect signaling when operating in theV.34,V.32bis
or V.32 (coded or uncoded) modulation modes.
AT MD0
=Off
Your modem disconnects without signaling the remote modem.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-22 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT MD1
=On
Your modem signals the remote modem to disconnect by sending a PSTN cleardown.
*
Modem Flow
Modem Flow Control
Lets the modem generate and respond to XON/XOFF flow control signals received at the
DIAL LINE or LEASED LINE port. NOTE: This option only applies to the Normal data
transfer mode.
AT MF0
*
=Off
=On
The modem flow control is not used.
AT MF1
*
The modem periodically sends XON signals to the remote modem when it can receive data.
When the modem cannot receive data, it sends an XOFF signal to the remote modem.
Mod
Modulation Mode
Determines the modulation mode used by the modem in data transmission. Changing
modulation mode resets AT MX (Max Rate) and AT MN (Min Rate) to their defaults for
*
*
the modulation mode selected. When you select a mode, ensure that the Max Rate AT MX
*
(Max Rate) and AT MN (Min Rate) parameter options are within the valid range for the
*
mode.
AT MM0
=V32bis Auto
=Auto V32
The modem negotiates the highest common connection in one of the following modulation
modes: V.32bis, V.32 (coded or uncoded), V.22bis, Bell 212, V.21 or Bell 103 (depending on
the Low Speed option).
*
AT MM1
The modem negotiates the highest common connection in one of the following modulation
modes: V.32 (coded or uncoded),V.22bis, Bell 212,V.21 or Bell 103 (depending on the Low
Speed option).
*
AT MM2
Mod=V32bis
Only
V.32bis or V.32 modulation mode is used.
*
AT MM3
=V32 Only
V.32 modulation mode is used.
*
AT MM12
*
=V32 Uncoded
V.32 modulation mode is used without the Trellis-coded Modulation (TCM) scheme. This
selection reduces end-to-end data delay. With this selection (while operating at 4.8 bps), you do
not have an embedded secondary channel (i.e., network management and remote configuration
capability are not available).
AT MM4
*
=V22bis Only
=212 Only
=103 Only
=V21 Only
=V.34 Auto
V.22bis modulation mode is used.
Bell 212 modulation mode is used.
Bell 103 modulation mode is used.
V.21 modulation mode is used.
AT MM5
*
AT MM6
*
AT MM7
*
AT MM10
*
The modem negotiates the highest common connection in one of the following modulation
modes: V.34, V.32bis, V.32 (coded or uncoded), V.22bis, Bell 212, V.21 or Bell 103 (depending
on the Low Speed option). This option does not display on the 3264V.32bis Series Modem.
AT MM11
=V.34 Only
The modem negotiates the highest common connection in the V.34 modulation mode. This
option does not display on the 3264V.32bis Series Modem.
*
Min Rate
Minimum Rate
Sets the minimum communication rate. Options vary with the modulation mode.
AT MN0
*
=300
AT MN1
*
=1200
=2400
=4800
=7200
AT MN2
*
AT MN3
*
AT MN4
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT MN5
*
=9600
=12.0
=14.4
=16.8
=19.2
=21.6
=24.0
=26.4
=28.8
=31.2
=33.6
DSR
AT MN6
*
AT MN7
*
AT MN8
(V.34 modems only)
*
AT MN9
*
(V.34 modems only)
AT MN10
*
(V.34 modems only)
AT MN11
(V.34 modems only)
*
AT MN12
(V.34 modems only)
*
AT MN13
*
(V.34 modems only)
AT MN14
*
(V.34 modems only)
AT MN15
(V.34 modems only)
*
DSR Control
Determines how the modem sets the DSR signal.
DSR is controlled by the modem.
DSR is always on.
AT MR0
*
=Normal
AT MRl
*
DSR=High
=DTR
AT MR2
DSR follows DTR.
*
AT MR3
=Drop on Disc
The same as the normal setting except that when a disconnection is initiated from the local end,
DSR is dropped immediately.
*
AT MR4
=Sim LL
The same as the DTR setting except DSR is dropped when the remote modem requests a
disconnect.
*
AT Msg
AT Message
Determines when the AT connect message is sent to the DTE.
The AT connect message is sent to the DTE after DCD is raised.
The AT connect message is sent to the DTE before DCD is raised.
Maximum Rate
AT MS0
*
=After CD
=Before CD
Max Rate
AT MS1
*
Sets the maximum rate at which the modems communicate over the analog network. Options
available vary with the modulation mode.
AT MX0
*
=300
AT MX1
*
=1200
=2400
=4800
=7200
=9600
=12.0
=14.4
=16.8
=19.2
=21.6
=24.0
=26.4
AT MX2
*
AT MX3
*
AT MX4
*
AT MX5
*
AT MX6
*
AT MX7
*
AT MX8
*
(V.34 modems only)
(V.34 modems only)
(V.34 modems only)
(V.34 modems only)
(V.34 modems only)
AT MX9
*
AT MX10
*
AT MX11
*
AT MX12
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-24 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT MX13
*
=28.8
=31.2
=33.6
Buffers
(V.34 modems only)
(V.34 modems only)
(V.34 modems only) (default)
Buffer Option
AT MX14
*
AT MX15
*
Lets you specify whether normal or reduced size buffers store data received from a local DTE.
Use this parameter if you have DTE-to-DTE flow control enabled, to reduce the amount of data
sent to the remote DTE when a flow-off condition is received at the local DTE.
AT NB0
*
=Regular
=Reduced
Normal capacity buffers are used.
AT NB1
*
Reduced sized buffers are used allowing less data to accumulate in the modem.
When the SDC modem is operating in synchronous reliable mode, selecting Buffers=Reduced
reduces throughput delay while transmitting data.
Netwrk Comp
Network Compensation
Lets you enhance modem performance reliability when operating with network equipment.
Off should be selected when making most normal connections within a continent.
AT NC0
*
=Off
AT NC1
*
=Lvl1
Select Lvl1 if the modem is experiencing performance problems when connected to a line
terminating equipment via a short loop, having low loop loss with below normal receive signal
levels (for example, when operating behind a low grade PBX). NOTE: This option limits the
maximum DCE data rate to 21,600 bps.
AT NC2
=Lvl2
Lvl2 is recommended when performance problems are encountered making intercontinental
calls. NOTE: This selection limits the maximum DCE data rate to 19,200 bps.
*
When operating in an environment where the conditions described for Lvl1 and Lvl2 exist,
Lvl2 is recommended to enhance performance.
AT ND
View Phone #
View Stored Telephone Numbers
*
Lets you view the telephone numbers stored in the modem’s nine telephone book addresses.
=n
Enter AT ND<CR>
*
Ext Cntrl
External Control
Lets you select which pin the AT OP (Ext Select) command responds to. NOTE: If AT OP
*
*
is set to 0, this command has no effect.
AT OC0
=Pin 14
=Pin 20
Loads an option set based on the transition of Pin 14. This setting overrides the AT RE
*
*
(Restore) command setting FP/116 or FP/116.ACU.
AT OC1
Loads an option set based on the transition of Pin 20. When using this setting, set the AT&D
(DTR) command to High. This setting overrides theAT RE (Restore) command settings FP/
108.1 and FP/108.ACU and all AT&D (DTR) command settings except High.
*
*
Ext Select
External Option Set Select (also known as 116 Select)
Controls how the modem uses an external pin to select option sets. The pin used is defined by
the AT OC (Ext Cntrl) command.
*
AT OP0
*
=Off
The AT OP command is disabled.
*
AT OP1
*
=1H/2L
There are 12 settings with the format nH-mL, where n=1, 2, 3, or 4, and m=1, 2, 3, or 4. When
the pin specified by the Ext Cntrl option (14 or 20) transitions from low to high, the modem
loads the “H” option set. When the pin specified by the Ext Cntrl option (14 or 20) transitions
from high to low, the modem loads the “L” option set.
AT OP2
*
=1H/3L
=1H/4L
AT OP3
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT OP4
*
=2H/1L
=2H/3L
=2H/4L
=3H/1L
=3H/2L
=3H/4L
=4H/1L
=4H/2L
=4H/3L
Overspeed
AT OP5
*
AT OP6
*
AT OP7
*
AT OP8
*
AT OP9
*
AT OP10
*
AT OP11
*
AT OP12
*
Overspeed
Lets modem compensate when an async DTE sends data to the modem faster than specified .
The modem compensates for DTE overspeed up to 1.0%.
The modem compensates for DTE overspeed up to 2.5%.
Enable/Disable Password Protection
AT OS0
*
=1%
AT OS1
*
=2.5%
Password
Enables and disables the Password function. Once you have enabled the Password function, set
protection in order to lock the modem (seeAT PF).
*
AT PE0
*
=Disable
Disables the Password function.
AT PE1
*
=Enable
Enables the Password function.
AT PF
Set Protection
Unlock Pass-
Lets you set protection to lock the modem. Refer to AT PN for details.
*
*
AT PN
If you know your password, to unlock a password-protected modem and gain access to all
word Protection modem functions, use the AT PNxxxx command (where xxxx is the password).
*
*
If you forget your password, you can regain access to all modem functions by performing the
following procedure.
IMPORTANT: When you unlock a modem with this procedure, option settings and
telephone numbers are deleted from modem memory. Before using the modem again,
reconfigure option settings and re-enter stored telephone numbers.
2)In the Status/Option Sets/Dialing menu, press
3)When you press , the modem displays Reinit All Mem?
4)Press again. The modem displays 326x Initial
until Reinit Memory? displays
5)The modem is now reset to factory default settings and all electronic telephone book entries
are deleted. Password protection is disabled and the password is set to 0000.
6)To use the password protection feature again, open Switch 4 on the modem rear panel (set it
to up position).
Dial
Dial Type
AT PT0
=Tone
The modem uses tone dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P dial modifiers in a
telephone number.
*
AT PTl
=Pulse
The modem uses pulse dialing unless otherwise specified by the T or P dial modifiers in a
telephone number.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-26 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT PT2
=Auto
The auto-call unit attempts to tone dial when initiating a call. If tone dialing is not possible,
pulse dialing is used.
*
For this feature to work correctly, the first character in a dial string must be a digi.tA T or P in
the dial string overrides this setting, for that dial string.
AT PWx/y
Change Pass-
word
Lets you change the modem’s password. Enter:
*
AT PWold password/new password<CR>
*
If successful, the modem responds with OK
Rmt Acc
Remote Access
Determines whether your modem can be configured by a remote modem.
The local modem cannot be configured by a remote modem.
The local modem can be configured by a remote modem.
Initiate/Terminate, or Abort Remote Configuration Session
Lets you initiate, terminate, or abort a remote configuration session with the connected modem.
AT RA0
*
=Disable
=Enable
AT RA1
*
Rmt Cnfg
AT RC0
=Terminate
=Abort
The modem terminates a remote configuration session with the connected modem. Changes to
the remote modem’s configuration are saved. This setting is not displayed unless you are
already in a remote configuration session.
*
AT RC1
The modem aborts a remote configuration session with the connected modem. Changes made
to the remote modem’s configuration are not saved. This setting is not displayed unless you are
already in a remote configuration session.
*
AT RC2
Init Rmt Cnfg? The modem attempts to initiate a remote configuration session with the connected modem. For
instructions on initiating a remote configuration session with a dial/leased line modem, or
terminating or aborting a remote configuration session, refer to Chapter 1 of the 326X Series
Modem Reference Guide.
*
AT RDn
Redial Last
Number
With this command, the modem redials a call until a successful connection is made or the call
has been attempted n times. This command causes your modem to redial the last number
dialed.
*
Restore
Initiate/Terminate Restoral
Determines how modems operating on a leased line handle initiation of a dial restoral session.
The modem has four ways of initiating restoral: automatic, manual, DTE signal, or DTE ACU.
The restoral option is available in models: 3261, 3263, 3266, and the 3268.
AT RE0
*
=Off
Disables the initiation of restoral.
AT RE1
*
Restore=FP Only Manual initiation lets you initiate and terminate restoral by pressing the Talk/Data key
ke(y
in the Home position) on the modem’s front panel.
AT RE2
=FP/108.1
=FP/116
The modem lets the DTE initiate restoral using DTR. In DTR restoral, an off-to-on DTR
transition from the DTE interface initiates restoral. This option is provided for DTEs that
cannot manipulate Circuit 116 for restoral purposes.
*
AT RE3
The modem allows the DTE to initiate restoral with Circuit 116. Circuit 116 lets you use
off-to-on transitions of this signal from the DTE to initiate restoral, according to ITU V.24
specifications.
*
AT RE4
=FP/Auto
In automatic restoral, the originating modem on the leased line determines when restoral takes
place. The answer modem cannot automatically initiate restoral; it can only answer an inbound
call, thus ensuring that both modems do not try to call each other at the same time. Such an
occurrence would result in a failed restoral attempt.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT RE5
=FP/108.ACU
=FP/116.ACU
Parity
With this option, off-to-on transitions of this signal from the DTE activate the ACU. This lets
the modem accept dial commands. With this option, either modem can enable the ACU when
the connected DTE turns Circuit 116 from off to on.
*
AT RE6
With this option, off-to-on transitions of this signal from the DTE activate the ACU. This lets
the modem accept dial commands to initiate restoral. With this option, either modem can
enable the ACU when the connected DTE turns Circuit 116 from off to on.
*
Parity
When using the ASCII character set, you must select the parity used by the modem and DTE.
The Parity option applies to asynchronous and character-synchronous data formats.
When set to V.25, the following applies:
Async: 7 Data Bits, Parity=even, Stop Bits=1
Bitsync: 7 Data Bits, Parity=space, Stop Bits=1 or 8 Data Bits, Parity=none, Stop Bits=1
Charsync: 7 Data Bits, Parity=odd, Stop Bits=1
7 Data Bits, Parity=even, Stop Bits=1
AT RP0
*
=V.25
AT RP1
*
=Even
AT RP2
Parity=Odd
=Mark
=Space
RTS
7 Data Bits, Parity=odd, Stop Bits=1
*
AT RP3
7 Data Bits, Parity=mark, Stop Bits=1 or 7 Data Bits, Parity=none, Stop Bits=2
7 Data Bits, Parity=space, Stop Bits=1 or 8 Data Bits, Parity=none, Stop Bits=1
RTS Control
*
AT RP4
*
The AT RS command determines how the modem interprets theRTS signal. The DTE
*
signals the modem with RTS on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 4 (V.24 Circuit 105).
AT RS0
*
=Normal
=High
The DTE controls data transmission with RTS.
AT RS1
*
The modem sets RTS high. Use this setting if the DTE does not provideRTS. If you are using
Normal or Reliable data transfer mode and you are using RTS/CTS flow control, this setting is
overridden and RTS operates as if RTS=Normal.
AT RS2
=Remote
This setting applies to simulated half-duplex applications and works only if the remote modem
also supports RTS/DCD signaling. For this application to work properly, the DCD option at the
remote site must be set to Remote. Coordinate your setting with the remote site.
*
Retrain
Auto Retrain
Enables the auto-retrain feature. When enabled, the modem retrains if the specified bit error
rate is exceeded. Enable Retrain for most applications because retrains allow the modem to
compensate for changing line conditions.
AT RT0
=Off
The modem does not automatically initiate retrains, but responds to retrains from the remote
modem.
*
AT RTl
=Low BER
The Low BER setting is more sensitive than the High BER setting.
*
Using V.34, V.32bis, V.32, or V.32 Uncoded, the modem retrains when the bit error rate (BER)
-4
exceeds approximately 10 for eight seconds.
-4
Using V.22bis, the modem retrains when the bit error rate (BER) exceeds approximately 10
for one second.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-28 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT RT2
=High BER
The High BER setting is less sensitive than the Low BER setting. NOTE: Telenetics recom-
mends this setting for most applications.
*
Using V.34, V.32bis, V.32, or V.32 Uncoded, the modem retrains when the bit error rate (BER)
-3
exceeds approximately 10 for eight seconds.
-3
Using V.22bis, the modem retrains when the bit-error rate (BER) exceeds approximately 10
for one second. When ARS is enabled, bit error rate is always used.
Speed Conver
Speed Conversion
Determines whether the modem uses the speed conversion feature. This option does not apply
when the modem is in the Direct or synchronous data transfer mode.
AT SC0
*
=Off
=On
The modem adjusts its DTE port speed to match the speed of the negotiated data link.
AT SC1
*
DTE-to-modem speed remains constant, regardless of the negotiated data link speed. (The
exception is Direct data mode, where the DTE-to-modem speed always matches the modem-
to-modem speed.)
Inactivity
DTE Inactivity
Lets you select how long the modem waits before disconnecting, when no data is transferred.
This option does not apply when the modem is set for the synchronous data transfer mode.
AT SI
*
=Off
The Off option disables the inactivity timer.
AT SI1
*
=3min
The modem disconnects if 3 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE.
AT SI2
Inactivity=10min The modem disconnects if 10 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE.
*
AT SI3
=20min
=30min
=S30min
EC ID
The modem disconnects if 20 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE.
The modem disconnects if 30 minutes elapses without data transfer to or from the DTE.
The inactivity timeout is controlled by the value set in S-Register 30.
Error Correction ID
*
AT SI4
*
AT SI5
*
Sets the ID number that modems exchange when they attempt to establish an MNP link.
AT SL0
=Default
=Codex
Mode
The modem identifies itself with a generic MNP identification number. Use this option unless
you are certain that the remote modem(s) is a Telenetics or Motorola modem.
*
AT SLl
The modem identifies itself with a special MNP identification number. This allows one Tele-
netics or Motorola modem to recognize another during an MNP link negotiation.
*
Data Transfer Mode
Sets the data transfer mode for asynchronous applications, or for synchronous applications
with the 326X-SDC. The setting governs the modem’s use of error correction. NOTE: To
enable SDC, select one of the reliable data transfer modes (Mode=Reliable, Auto Reliable, or
Speed Dependent Auto Reliable).
AT SM0
=Direct
In Direct mode (asynchronous or synchronous), the modem does not use error correction. In
Direct mode, EC/DC OPT’s menu options are disabled. In data mode, the DTE speed must
match the modem speed.
*
AT SM1
=Normal
In normal mode (asynchronous), the modem does not use error correction or data compression.
The break type is assumed to be standard. In data mode, the modem uses speed conversion (if
enabled). This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds.
*
Enable terminal flow control and Modem Flow when operating in Normal mode. Selecting
Mode=Normal results in a Direct synchronous connection in the SDC mode.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT SM2
=Reliable
In an asynchronous application, once the local modem connects with the remote modem, it
attempts to establish an error-corrected link. In Reliable data mode, the modem uses speed
conversion (if enabled). The local modem disconnects if it cannot establish an error-corrected
link. Enable the terminal flow control when operating in reliable mode. Ifthe modem
negotiates a connection in theV.21 or Bell 103 modulation mode, it terminates the call.
*
If operating with SDC enabled in both modems, once the local modem connects with the
remote modem, it attempts to establish an error-corrected link. In SDC mode, the Data
Compression (AT DC) and Error Correction (AT EC) options are ignored; a connection is
*
*
attempted usingV.42bis data compression and LAPM error correction. The local modem
establishes a synchronous Reliable connection or disconnects if it cannot establish an
error-corrected link. In Reliable data mode, the modem uses speed conversion (if enabled).
Enable the terminal flow control when operating in reliable mode. If the modem negotiates a
connection in the V.21 or Bell 103 modulation mode, it terminates the call.
In Reliable data mode, leased-line operation, the modem initiates a retrain if the
error-correction function does not establish a reliable link within 30 seconds.
AT SM3
=Auto-Reliable
Once the local modem connects with the remote modem, it attempts to establish an
error-corrected link. In Auto-Reliable data mode, the modem uses speed conversion (if
enabled). This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds. The
modem reverts to Normal mode if it cannot establish an error-corrected link. In SDC mode,
with the Auto Rel option, the modem reverts to Direct mode if it cannot establish an
error-corrected link.
*
Enable terminal flow control when operating in the Auto-Reliable mode. If the local modem
negotiates a connection in theV.21 or Bell 103 modulation mode, Normal mode is used in
asynchronous applications; Direct mode is used in synchronous applications.
AT SM4
=Spd AutoRel
Speed-Dependent Auto-Reliable. Once the local modem connects with the remote modem, it
attempts to establish an error-corrected link. If a connection is established at 1200 bps or less,
Normal mode is used in async applications; Direct mode is used in sync applications.
*
In data mode, the Speed-Dependent Auto-Reliable mode uses speed conversion (if enabled).
This lets the modem automatically accommodate DTEs of different speeds. Enable terminal
flow control when operating in the Auto-Reliable mode.
RemRTS/DCD RTS/DCD Remote Signaling
This command allows for two types of PN signaling. It is valid when RTS or DCD=Remote.
AT SR0
= Codex
The Codex setting lets you configure the modem for Telenetics- or Motorola-proprietary
signaling.
*
AT SR1
= V.13
This setting allows ITU V.13-compliant signaling for synchronous applications only.
*
AT ST0
*
Long-form status Refer to AT&V for a description of theAT ST command.
*
AT ST1
*
Short-form status
TpDlyMin
Throughput Minimization Delay
Lets you improve modem performance in SDC mode by minimizing delays during data
transmission. This feature, when enabled, lets the remote modem, only, begin transmitting
synchronous data to its DTE, before an entire frame of data has been received from the local
modem. This option applies only when the modem is operating in SDC mode.
AT TD0
=Off
Throughput Delay Minimization is disabled. With this setting, the remote modem waits until it
has received an entire frame of data before beginning to transmit the data to its DTE.
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-30 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT TD1
=Rx Clock
With this setting, the remote modem uses its internal Rx Clock to control the flow of data from
the modem to the DTE, preventing a loss of synchronization during data transmission. This
setting lets the remote modem begin transmitting data before an end-of-frame has been
received from the local modem. If the rate of data transmission slows, the clock stops,
temporarily ceasing the flow of data.
*
Telenetics recommends that the Rx Clock setting be used in most applications.
NOTE: This setting is operational only when Clock=Internal (AT&X).
AT TD2
=RxD Dly
With this setting, the remote modem continuously monitors and adjusts line traffic to estimate
(based on time) when to transmit data to the DTE. The modem calculates a delay time based on
variables such as frame size, DTE rate, DCE rate, and data compression ratio. The remote
modem waits this time before transmitting data to its DTE. NOTE: Due to variable line
conditions or varying types of data, frame losses could result with this selection.
*
Tone Length
Tone Length
Determines the time duration of the DTMF (Dual Tone Multifrequency) tone. This command is
operational only when tone dialing is selected using dial modifiers or the ATT command.
AT TL0
*
=72
Tone length is 72 ms.
AT TL1
*
=S11
The tone length is determined by S-Register 11. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Call Timeout
Call Timeout
Determines how long the modem waits from the time it completes dialing to the time it detects
answer-back tone from the remote modem. If the modem does not receive answer-back tone
from the remote modem within the specified time, the modem disconnects.
AT TT0
*
=30
=45
=60
=90
=180
=S7
The modem waits 30 seconds for a call to succeed.
The modem waits 45 seconds for a call to succeed.
The modem waits 60 seconds for a call to succeed.
The modem waits 90 seconds for a call to succeed.
The modem waits 180 seconds for a call to succeed.
AT TT1
*
AT TT2
*
AT TT3
*
AT TT4
*
AT TT5
*
The modem waits the amount of time specified by S-Register 7 for a call to succeed. See
Appendix C for your country’s options.
RelMsg
This command applies to the Reliable and Auto-Reliable data transfer modes only. The local
modem can send a reliable message to the DTE along with the normal connect message if both
modems negotiated a reliable (error-corrected) connection.
AT XC0
=Off
If enabled, the modem sends a connect message to the DTE, but it does not send the reliable
portion of the connect message. A typical connect message is CONNECT 9600.
*
AT XCl
=Short
The modem sends a reliable connect message to the DTE when a reliable connection is
successful. The message indicates the local DTE-to-modem data rate, but no error correction or
data compression is included. Atypical short reliable connect message is CONNECT 9600
RELIABLE.
*
AT XC2
=Long
The modem sends a reliable connect message to the DTE when a connection is successful. The
message indicates that the local DTE-to-modem data rate, as well as the error-correction and
data-compression schemes, are being used. A typical long reliable connect message is
CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE EC=(LAPM) DC=(V42bis).
*
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
Callback
Callback Feature
Determines the source of the telephone number that your modem calls when it receives a valid
access security password from the remote modem.
NOTE: For details on access security and call features, see Chapter 2 of the 326X Series
Modem Reference Guide.
AT ZC0
=Off
Callback is disabled.
*
AT ZC1 – 9 =Intern 1 – 9
The answer modem performs the callback using the phone number stored in the specified
location (even if the calling modem provides a callback number).
*
AT ZC10
=Remote
The answer modem performs the callback using a number provided by the remote user. If the
calling modem does not provide a callback number and the password is valid, the modem
attempts a connection, without hanging up or calling back.
*
Only accessi- =Manager
ble from an
NMS
The NMS performs the callback using a phone number stored in its database that is associated
with the received ID code. This option is not accessible from the front panel or AT ACU and
displays only when selected by an NMS.
AT ZC12
=Rmt Ind
The answer modem performs the callback using the phone number stored at the specified
phone number index provided by the remote user (1 – 9). If the remote device does not provide
a callback index, the modem attempts to establish a connection without hanging up or calling
*
back if AT ZR0 (Rmt Num Rqrd=Off) is set.
*
DialRstrct
Dial Restricted
This command defines dial command limitations.
AT ZD0
*
=Off
No dial restrictions exist.
AT ZD1
*
=Lvl1
The auto redial command is not allowed. The A/ command is not allowed if the previous
command was a dial command. In both cases, the modem reports an ERROR message to the
DTE.
AT ZD2
=Lvl2
Lvl2 has the same function as Lvl1. In addition, only stored phone numbers may be dialed. The
ATD, V.25bis CRN, LPDA2 Hex 21, and the front panel Enter Then Dial options are not
allowed.
*
AT ZI
Enter Group
PW?
Enter Access Security Group Password
*
Lets you enter the password that your modem uses for access security.
Enter AT ZIx<CR>, where x=maximum 10 characters; minimum one character
*
From the front panel, enter alphanumeric characters.
NOTE: For a detailed description of the modem’s access security and call features, refer to
Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
Tone
Select Tones with Access Security
Controls the type of tones used by your modem to alert the caller to expect a callback and to
enter the access security password.
AT ZP0
*
=None
No tones are generated by the answer modem.
AT ZP1
*
=Prompt Only
Upon answering a call, the local modem sends the caller a dial tone. Thisis a prompt for the
caller to enter the access security password. This setting is intended for manual dialing only.
The dial tone lasts for the amount of time specified by S-Register 45. The caller must enter the
access security password in the amount of time specified by S-Register 46.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-32 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-1.
AT Commands, Cross-Referenced to Front Panel Options (Continued)
AT
Command
Parameter &
Option
Description
AT ZP2
=Ack Only
After validating the password, the modem generates an acknowledgment tone before hanging
up. This indicates to the caller that the access security password is valid and that the modem
should expect to receive a callback. Upon hearing the tone, the caller should hang up
immediately. This setting is intended for callback only.
*
AT ZP3
=Prompt/Ack
Upon answering a call, the local modem generates both the prompt and acknowledgment tone
at the appropriate times. This setting is intended for manual dialingonly.
*
NOTE: For a detailed description of how the modem’s access security and call features
operate, refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
Rem Num Rqrd Remote Number Required
Specifies whether a remote callback number is required when using AT ZC (Callback).
*
NOTE: For a detailed description of how the modem’s access security and call features
operate, refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
AT ZR0
=Off
A remote callback number is not required. If the calling modem does not provide a callback
number, the modem attempts to establish a connection without hanging up or calling back.
*
AT ZR1
=On
A remote callback number is required. The modem does not attempt to make a connection or
callback if no callback number is provided.
*
Sim Ring
Simulated Ringback
Determines whether the answer modem sends a ringback tone to the calling modem prior to
sending an answer-back tone immediately after entering the access security password.
NOTE: For a detailed description of how the modem’s access security and call features
operate, refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
AT ZS0
*
=Disable
=Enable
No ringback tone is sent to the remote modem prior to sending an answer-back tone.
AT ZS1
*
After receiving the access security password, the answer modem sends a ringback tone to the
remote modem (prior to sending an answer-back tone).
PW Verify
Password Verification
This command determines whether the access security feature is enabled. If access security is
enabled, this option selects the method used to verify a password.
NOTE: For a detailed description of how the modem’s access security and call features
operate, refer to Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference Guide.
AT ZV0
*
=Dis
Password and callback features are disabled.
AT ZV1
*
=Intern
A single password, stored in modem memory, is checked against the received password. This
password is stored in modem memory using the AT ZI (Enter Group PW?) command.
*
Only
accessible
Mngr
The network management system verifies the received password. Although displayed at the
modem, this selection is not accessible by the front panel orAT ACU.
with an NMS
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-2.
Front Panel Configuration Options
Parameter &
326X Menu Option
Description
ACU OPT’S ACU Select
Determines which Auto-Call Unit (ACU) the modem uses. To enable SDC: select an ACU
(ACU Select), a bit-synchronous data format (for the AT and V.25bis ACUs), and
Mode=Reliable, Auto Reliable, or Speed Auto Reliable (AT SM).
*
=AT
The AT auto-call unit is used.
To enable SDC: after selecting AT ACU, select a data format (AT&M). The options are: Sync
:V25b
The V.25bis auto call unit is used.
To enable SDC: after selecting V25b, select a data format (AT&M). The options are: AsynSync
or Bitsync (see next parameter, below).
:LPDA2
:None
The LPDA-2 auto-call unit is used.
After selecting LPDA (LPDA transmits data synchronously), to enable SDC, select
Mode=Reliable, Auto Reliable, or Speed Auto Reliable (AT SM).
*
No auto call unit is used.
To enable SDC: after selecting None, choose a synchronous data format using the NoACU Form
option (discussed later in this table).
V25Form
Determines the format of data when the ACU Select option is set to V25b.
To enable SDC: after selecting V.25bis ACU, choose one of the synchronous data formats
(AsynSync or Bitsync). Select Mode=Reliable, Auto Reliable, or Speed Auto Reliable
(AT SM).
*
=Async
Modem is compatible with asynchronous DTEs.
: AsynSync
:Bitsync
Modem dials calls asynchronously, but data is passed synchronously.
The DTE uses the bit-synchronous, HDLC-like protocol outlined in the ITU V.25bis
specification.
: Charsync
The DTE uses the character-synchronous protocol outlined in the ITU V.25bis specification.
NOTE: Charsync is not available for the SDC operating mode.
NoAcu Form
This option determines the format of data when ACU Select=off.
To enable SDC: after selecting ACU Select=None, choose NoAcu Form=Sync. Select
Mode=Reliable, Auto Reliable, or Speed Auto Reliable (AT SM).
*
=Async
Asynchronous data is passed in data mode.
:Sync
Synchronous data is passed in data mode.
Char Length
Applies to asynchronous data applications that use the direct data transfer mode (no error
correction). The modem ignores this option in the normal, reliable, or auto-reliable data transfer
modes.
Do not change this option unless your application requires it. If you must change it, select the
option that corresponds to the number of bits that your DTE uses to code a character (start bit,
data bits, parity bit, and stop bit) NOTE: Autobauding works only with 10-bit characters.
=8
Modem is compatible with 8-bit characters.
Modem is compatible with 9-bit characters.
Modem is compatible with 10-bit characters.
Modem is compatible with 11-bit characters.
Determines the type of character the V.25bis ACU uses.
The V.25bis ACU uses ASCII character format.
The V.25bis ACU uses EBCDIC character format.
:9
:10
:11
V25 Char
=ASCII
:EBCDIC
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-34 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-2.
Front Panel Configuration Options (Continued)
Parameter &
326X Menu Option
Description
Sync Idle
Applies to synchronous applications only (direct synchronous or SDC operating modes). Your
modem sends Marks or Characters on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 3 (V.24 Circuit 104) to the DTE when
it has no messages to send.
=Mark
:Char
Modem sends continuous Marks (or one bits) on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 3 (V.24 Circuit 104) to the
DTE when it has no messages to send.
Applies to V.25bis, and LPDA2 ACUs.
If the modem is configured forV.25bis and V25Form=Charsync, it sends a continuous stream of
SYN (synchronizing) Characters on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 3 (V.24 Circuit 104) when it has no
messages to send. If V25Form=Bitsync, it sends continuous flags (7E hexadecimal) when it has
no messages to send.
If the modem is configured for LPDA2, it sends continuous flags (7E hexadecimal) when it does
not have a message to send.
V25 Resp
When using the V.25bis ACU, the modem always indicates a valid connection after the local
modem and remote modem switch to data mode.You can receive an indication of call progress
at your DTE. The V25 Resp option chooses the response you receive.
=V25bis
:V25rate
The modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message once
an answer-back tone is received from the remote modem.
The modem sends a VAL message upon receipt of the dial command and a CNX message
followed by the data rate once the modem switches to data mode.
:VALOnly
V25 Resp:
The modem sends a VAL message when the modems switch to data mode.
The modem does not send a message to the DTE.
LPDA2 Addr
Lets you select the modem’s address. (See Chapter 2 of the 326X Series Modem Reference
Guide for details.)
LPDA2 ID
=326X
Allows the modem type to be returned in the data field response field.
Sends 3260 in data response.
:7855
Sends 7855 in data response.
LPDA2 Det
=Enab
LPDA2 commands are recognized in the data stream and the commands are processed.
LPDA2 command frames are not recognized as commands.
:Disab
TELCO
DL TX Level
Displays the modem’s dial line transmit level, which is set for your country’s requirements.
OPT’S
=0 to -15
The modem is set to transmit at a level in the 0 to -15 dBm range.
Displays the modem’s leased line transmit level, which is set for your country’s requirements.
The modem is set to transmit at a level in the 0 to -15 dBm range.
Adjustable Transmit Levels—V.34 Modulation Mode
LL TX Level
=0 to -15
In the V.34 modulation mode, the local and remote modems negotiate a transmit level (for the
dial/leased line) during the training sequence. This allows the modems to select the lowest
possible transmit level in order to maximize the signal to echo level in the receiver. A typical
range for the reduction of the transmit level is 0 to -14 dBm.
NOTE: Although the modem negotiates a transmit level that may differ from the rate indicated
for your country, the front panel DL TX and LL TX Levels options remain the same. The CQMS
parameter, Tx Level, however, displays the actual transmit level in use for a connection.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
Configuration Quick Reference A-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-2.
Front Panel Configuration Options (Continued)
Parameter &
326X Menu Option
Description
ACCESS
SECURITY
Group PW
Determines if the modem can verify a received password when PW Verify=Mngr (AT ZV) and
the network management system is unable to perform the verification. This option is not
accessible from the front panel or the AT ACU. It is displayed for status purposes only.
The modem cannot verify the password.
*
=Disable
:Enable
The modem can verify the password using its Group PW stored internally.
Determines whether your modem can be controlled by the network manager.
NETWK
CNTL OPT’S
OverrideMode
=Off
The network manager can attach your modem. When it has attached, front panel control is
locked out. You can display options and status in the front panel menu tree, but you cannot
change options. If you attempt to change a setting, the modem displays Net Man Attached.
:On
The network manager cannot attach your modem.
NC Address
Lets you set the modem’s network control address. This is the address that modems use with the
SET RMT LL ADDR and SRCH RMT LL ADDR functions. The range of addresses is 0 to 254.
To set a network control address, see “Performing Numeric Entry” in this appendix.
NC PortRate
Set the NC Port Rate option to match the speed of your network manager. This option controls
the speed of the NC ports on your modem’s rear panel.
= 75
Configures the network control port for speeds indicated in bits per second (bps).
: 110
: 150
:1200
:2400
:4800
:9600
Pass Thru
The modem uses an in-band secondary channel to pass network management data to the remote
modem. The channel is not disruptive to main channel user data. Pass Thru controls how
network control data is passed to the remote modem when the modem is configured as DIAL.
=opt 1
=opt 2
The local modem (connected to a network manager through the NC port) does not forward all
network management data received from the NC port to the remote modem over the in-band
secondary channel. Only commands from the network manager to the remote modem are passed
through. Only remote-modem responses are passed to the network manager.
The modems do no filtering. They pass all network management data received from the NC port
to the in-band secondary channel and from the in-band secondary channel to the NC port.
SET RMT LL New Address=nnn The SET RMT LL ADDR menu is for use with remote configuration on leased lines. Using this
ADDR
option, you can set the remote modem’s address.
Rmt Ser#=
nnnnnnn
Rmt Nest
Modem=No, A, B.
SRCH RMT Rmt
LL ADDR Ser#=nnnnnnn
The SRCH RMT LL ADDR menu is for use with remote configuration on leased lines. Using
this option, you can search for the remote modem’s address.
Rmt Nest
Modem=No, A, B.
Gray shading indicates country-specific options. See Appendix C for your country’s options.
A-36 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Performing Numeric Entry
The following options require you to enter information using the front panel orACU.
Front Panel Option
Enter Phone #=n
Enter Then Dial
S-Reg xxx=nnn
LPDA-2 Addr=nnn
Enter PW:nnnn
Description
Stores phone number to phone book memory in location n.
Lets you dial from the front panel.
Lets you set S-Register xxx to nnn.
Lets you set the LPDA2 address.
Lets you unlock a modem’s password protection.
Lets you enter old password.
Old PW:nnnn
New PW:nnnn
Lets you configure new password.
Lets you verify new password.
Verify PW:nnnn
Enter Group PW:
NC Address:nnn
New Address:nnn
Rmt Ser:nnnnnnn
Lets you verify group password.
Lets you set network control address.
Lets you set remote modem’s leased line address.
Lets you enter remote modem’s serial number.
The keystrokes to set the numeric entry for these options are as follows:
1) Step across the front panel menu by pressing
until the option you want to
change displays.
2) Press . You are now ready to key in the numeric entry.
3) Press
until the digit or character you want appears in the leftmost position
of the display.
Example: 1xxxxx
4) Press . The display shifts one position to the left, and the second character
position is displayed.
5) Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you have completed keying in the numeric entry. To
re-enter a number or character, press
the line, then re-enter the number or character.
6) Press to save your selection.
to place the cursor at the beginning of
Configuration Quick Reference A-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S-Register/AT Command Cross-Reference
This section shows the modem’s S-Registers cross-referenced with AT Commands
Table A-3.
S-Register Cross-Reference
S-Register
AT Command Front Panel Option
S0—Ring Count to Answer On
S1—Ring Count
AT AA5
Answer=Using S0
*
—
—
—
—
—
—
S2—Escape Code Character
S3—Carriage Return Character
S4—Line Feed Character
S5—Backspace Character
S6—Wait for Dial Tone
S7—Wait for Data Character
S7—Wait for Data Character
—
—
—
—
AT BD2
Blind Dial=S6
Dial Wait=S7
Call Timeout=S7
Pause Delay=S8
*
AT DD9
*
AT TT5
*
S8—Pause Time for Pause Delay Dial
AT DP4
*
Modifiers
S10—Carrier Loss Hang Up Delay
S11—DTMF Tone Duration
S12—Escape Code Guard Time
S18—Test Timer
AT CD3
DCD Loss Dis=S10
*
AT TL1
Tone Length=S11
*
—
—
—
—
—
S25—Delay Before Looking for DTR
S26—RTS/CTS Delay
—
AT DL4
RTS/CTS Delay=S26
Inactivity=S30
Delay=S38
*
S30—DTE Inactivity Disconnect
S38—Disconnect Buffer Delay
S45—Access Security Tone Duration
AT SI5
*
AT DB3
*
—
—
S46—Access Security Lead Digit Delay
Timeout
S96—Signalling System #5
S97—Break Signal Duration
S98—AC Detect
AT S96
=0 to 1
*
AT S97
=0 to 39
=0 to 1
*
AT S98
*
S99—V.32 Training Time
AT S99
=0 to 216
*
A-38 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dial Modifiers for Special Dialing Requirements
When entering telephone numbers into modem memory or dialing directly from the
lists the dial modifiers used in AT ACU applications.
Table A-4.
Dial Modifiers
Modifier Function Description
W
w
:
Dial Wait Instructs the modem to stop and wait for a dial tone. If the modem
does not detect a dial tone after a specified period, it aborts the
call. The factory default for dial wait is country-specific (refer to
Appendix C for details). In the U. S. A., the default is two seconds.
You can change this interval using the Dial Wait option.
K
k
<
,
Pause
Delay
When any of these modifiers are encountered in a dial string or
command line, the modem pauses. The factory default pause delay
is three seconds. This default can be extended with the Pause
Delay command. The comma modifier can be used as a command
outside the dial string.
P
p
Pulse
Tone
Flash
When either of these modifiers are encountered in a dial string, if
Dial=Auto (AT PT—DIALING OPTS menu), the Dial setting is
*
not changed from Auto. If set to other than Auto, the pulse/tone
setting is modified to force pulse dialing.
If no pulse dial modifier is inserted in the number stream, the
modem dials according to the pulse/tone setting of the Dial option
in the front panel DIALING OPT’S menu. These modifiers can
also be used as commands outside the dial string.
T
t
When either of these modifiers are encountered in a dial string, if
Dial=Auto (AT PT—DIALING OPTS menu), the Dial option
*
setting is not changed from Auto. If set to other than Auto, the
pulse/tone setting is modified to force tone dialing.
If no tone dial modifier is inserted in the number stream, the
modem dials according to the pulse/tone setting or the Dial option
in the front panel DIALING OPT’S menu. These modifiers can
also be used as a command outside of the dial string.
&
!
Instructs the modem to flash hook (a control signal used by many
PBXs to enable special dial features, such as transferring a call).
;
Return to Instructs the modem to return to command state after dialing,
command without breaking the connection. The modem can dial but cannot
state after train, and no call progress messages are received. This modifier is
dialing
used when calling an electronic service that permits the user to
transmit numbers using tones, once a connection is established.
Configuration Quick Reference A-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-4.
Dial Modifiers (Continued)
Modifier Function Description
@
Quiet
Answer
Makes the modem look for one or more ringbacks (followed by
five seconds of silence) within the delay time specified by Call
Timeout. If five seconds of delay silence is detected, the modem
continues to dial the string. If the line is busy, the modem hangs up
and sends a BUSY message to the DTE. If the modem does not
detect delay silence or a busy signal, the modem hangs up and the
screen displays NO ANSWER.
R
Reverse
Must be the last character in the dial string before a carriage return.
The R modifier makes the modem originate the call in answer
mode and is used to dial an originate-only modem. Immediately
after the dial command is processed, an answer-back tone is
generated and the modem attempts to complete the connection for
the length of time specified by Call Time-out.
H
h
Discon-
nect
Makes the modem disconnect from the dial line. This must be the
last modifier in the dial string, and must also be preceded by a
semicolon. If this modifier is not preceded by a semicolon, it is
ignored by the modem. The modifier can be entered through the
front panel, the AT ACU, or network manager.
(space)
. (period) tation
Presen-
These characters do not act as modifiers. They are presentation
characters that are ignored.
- (dash)
( ) paren-
theses
characters
A-40 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Result Codes
Result codes are responses sent to the terminal by the AT ACU. Result codes may be
sent in word form (RsltForm=Verbose or ATV1), numeric form (RsltForm=Numeric
or ATV0), or disabled (RsltCode=Disable or ATQ1). When numeric form is selected,
the modem issues only a number code.
The rate displayed in a CONNECT message depends on the Connect Message option
(ACU OPTS menu). If Con Msg=DTE Rate, the DTE-to-modem rate is displayed. If
Con Msg=DCE Rate, the modem-to-modem rate is displayed. If Speed
Conversion=Off (AT SC0), or if the modem is operating in Direct or synchronous
*
modes, the CONNECT message speed reflects both the DTE-to-modem and the
modem-to-modem rate, which are the same.
Table A-5 provides a listing of word- and numeric-form result codes.
Table A-5.
Result Codes
Word Form Response
OK
Numeric Form Response
0
CONNECT
1
RING
2
NO CARRIER
3
ERROR
4
CONNECT 1200
NO DIALTONE
BUSY
5
6
7
NO ANSWER
8
PASSWORD PROTECTED
INITIATING RC
RC NOT AVAILABLE
RC FAILED
40
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
60
13
10
11
15
12
16
17
18
14
19
RC DENIED
RC ESTABLISHED
UNDER RMT CONFIG
RC COMPLETE
RC ABORTED
RC SESSION IN PROGRESS
NETWORK MANAGEMENT INHIBITED
CONNECT 600
CONNECT 2400
CONNECT 4800
CONNECT 7200
CONNECT 9600
CONNECT 12000
CONNECT 14400
CONNECT 16800
CONNECT 19200
CONNECT 21600
Configuration Quick Reference A-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-5.
Result Codes (Continued)
Word Form Response
CONNECT 24000
Numeric Form Response
20
63
64
67
68
22
61
62
23
24
26
27
28
29
65
21
33
25
30
31
35
32
36
37
38
34
39
41
84
85
87
88
42
82
83
76
77
78
79
80
81
86
21
33
25
CONNECT 26400
CONNECT 28800
CONNECT 31200
CONNECT 33600
CONNECT 38400
CONNECT 48000
CONNECT 56000
CONNECT 57600
CONNECT 64000
CONNECT 72000
CONNECT 76800
CONNECT 96000
CONNECT 115200
CONNECT 128000
CONNECT RELIABLE
CONNECT 600 RELIABLE
CONNECT 1200 RELIABLE
CONNECT 2400 RELIABLE
CONNECT 4800 RELIABLE
CONNECT 7200 RELIABLE
CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE
CONNECT 12000 RELIABLE
CONNECT 14400 RELIABLE
CONNECT 16800 RELIABLE
CONNECT 19200 RELIABLE
CONNECT 21600 RELIABLE
CONNECT 24000 RELIABLE
CONNECT 26400 RELIABLE
CONNECT 28800 RELIABLE
CONNECT 31200 RELIABLE
CONNECT 33600 RELIABLE
CONNECT 38400 RELIABLE
CONNECT 48000 RELIABLE
CONNECT 56000 RELIABLE
CONNECT 57600 RELIABLE
CONNECT 64000 RELIABLE
CONNECT 72000 RELIABLE
CONNECT 76800 RELIABLE
CONNECT 96000 RELIABLE
CONNECT 115200 RELIABLE
CONNECT 128000 RELIABLE
CONNECT RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 600 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 1200 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
A-42 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-5.
Result Codes (Continued)
Word Form Response
Numeric Form Response
CONNECT 2400 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 4800 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 7200 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 9600 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 12000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 14400 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 16800 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 19200 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 21600 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 24000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 26400 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 28800 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 31200 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 33600 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 38400 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 48000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 56000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 57600 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 64000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 72000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 76800 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 96000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 115200 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
CONNECT 128000 RELIABLE EC=(xxx) DC=(yyy)
30
31
35
32
36
37
38
34
39
41
84
85
87
88
42
82
83
76
77
78
79
80
81
86
NOTES:
1) When CONNECT messages are displayed, xxx indicates which error-
correction scheme (LAPM or MNP 1-4) the modems are using, and yyy
indicates which data compression scheme (V.42bis or MNP-5) the modems are
using.
2) When a reliable connection has been established with the remote modem, the
RELIABLE result code is displayed only when the Mode option (under the
EC/DC OPT’S menu) is configured for Reliable (AT SM2), Auto Rel
*
(AT SM3), or Spd AutoRel (AT SM4). Also, the Rel Msg option (under the
*
*
ACU OPT’S menu) must be set for Long (AT XC2) or Short (AT XC1).
*
*
Also, you receive error-correction and data-compression information in your result
code only when the Rel Msg option is set to Long.
Configuration Quick Reference A-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Configuring the Modem’s Dual In-line Package (DIP) Switches
The standalone modem has a 6-position DIP switch that lets you “hard” configure
certain aspects of the modem’s operation. The modem is shipped from the factory
with all switches in the Off (up) position. DIP switch selections cannot be overridden
using the remote front panel configuration.
DIAL
LINE
PHONE
NC
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Factory Preset 6-Position DIP
switches, in Off (up) position.
1
2
3
4
5
6
and explains their function. NOTE: For information on the DIP switch on 3262,
3263, 3267, and 3268 Modem cards, see the addendum, 326X Series Modem Cards,
shipped with your modem’s backplane.
Table A-6.
Rear Panel Switches
Switch
Number Setting
Function
1
Off (up)
EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 23 is set for data rate input. Setting Switch 1
to this position has no effect on modem operation. NOTE: When
operating with a V.35 electrical interface, leave switch S1 in the
off (up) position at all times.
2
On (down)
Off (up)
EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 23 is set as a data indicator.
Busy Out select. A signal on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 25 makes the
modem appear busy to incoming calls.
NOTES:
1) You must set DTE Pin 25=Busy (AT LT, TERMINAL
*
OPT’s category) to enable Busy Out Select.
2) The AT&J Telco option command must be set to RJ4MB.
On (down)
Test Indicator Signal (V.24 Circuit 142) Select. The modem
signals to the terminal on EIA/TIA 232-D Pin 25 (V.24 Circuit
142) when a test is in progress.
NOTES:
1) You must set DTE Pin 25=Test (AT LT, TERMINAL
*
OPT’s category) to enable Busy Out Select.
2) The AT&J Telco option command must be set to RJ4MB.
A-44 Configuration Quick Reference
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table A-6.
Rear Panel Switches (Continued)
Switch
Number Setting
Function
3
4
5
Off (up)
Front panel enable. The front panel functions normally.
On (down)
Front panel disable. You can check only the status displays.
NOTE: If the modem is under remote configuration control, the
controlling modem retains full front-panel control.
Off (up)
Normal password protection applies.
On (down)
Reinitializes modem to its factory settings. Use this when you
forget your password, to unlock password protection. (See
*
Off (up)
The AT and V.25bis, or LPDA-2 command sets can be used from
an attached terminal.
On (down)
AT and V.25bis commands cannot be used from an attached
terminal. NOTE: If the modem is under remote configuration
control, the controlling modem retains AT ACU control.
6
Off (up)
Factory use only. For proper operation, this switch must be off.
Configuration Quick Reference A-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B
Cabling and Interface Pinouts
Contents
Cable Considerations ...............................................................................
Cabling and Interface Pinouts B-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This appendix describes the following:
• Interface pinouts common to all modem models, including:
— EIA/TIA 232-D, and ITU V.35 Recommendation modem-to-computer
interfaces
— NC IN and OUT network control port interfaces
• 326X/326X-SDC cabling requirements and diagnostics
Audio connector (DIAL LINE, LEASE/PRIVATE LINE, and PHONE) pinouts vary
EIA/TIA 232-D (Modem to Computer) Interface
The modem’s digital interface conforms to the EIA/TIA 232-D standard and ITU
V.24, ITU V.28, and ISO 2110; the modem should be connected to a data terminal
Table B-1.
Modem/Computer Interface Connections
EIA/TIA
Pin 232-D
ITU V.24 Signal
Definition
1
2
—
—
—
Not used.
BA
103
Transmitted Data Digital data transmitted from the local terminal to the remote modem.
(TXD)
3
4
5
6
7
8
BB
CA
CB
CC
AB
CF
104
105
106
107
102
109
Received Data
(RXD)
Demodulated data received by the local terminal from the remote
modem.
Request To Send Sent from local terminal to local modem to ready it for data
(RTS)
transmission.
Clear To Send
(CTS)
Passes from the local modem to the local terminal when the data port is
clear to transmit data. Occurs in response to Request To Send.
Data Set Ready
(DSR)
Indicates the local modem is ready to transmit and receive data.
Signal Ground
Common signal. Provides a common ground reference point for
interface circuitry.
Data Carrier
Detect (DCD)
Passed from the local modem to the local DTE when an acceptable
carrier signal is received by the modem.
9
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Not Used.
Not Used.
10
11
—
Answer/
Originate Select
Signal passed from terminal to modem to select answer/originate
status. When signal is on, answer signal is selected. When signal is off,
originate signal is selected. This signal works with Mode=External.
B-2 Cabling and Interface Pinouts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table B-1.
Modem/Computer Interface Connections (Continued)
EIA/TIA
Pin 232-D
ITU V.24 Signal
Definition
12 CI
112
110
—
Data Signal Rate CI (112) is passed from modem to terminal, indicating signaling rate.
Indicator
When signal is on, modem operates at 2400 bps or greater. When
signal is off, modem operates below 2400 bps.
13
14
—
—
Signal Quality
Signal passes from modem to terminal indicating signal quality of
telephone line. When signal is on, signal quality is acceptable. When
signal is off, signal quality is poor.
Ext Select
(All models.) Signal passed from terminal to modem to select between
two option sets. Works in conjunction with Ext Select option.
(Models 3261/3263/3266/3268 only.) Signal passed from terminal to
modem indicating whether to use a dial line or a leased line. When
signal is on, modem uses a dial line. When signal is off, modem uses a
leased line. This signal is used in Restoral mode only.
15 DB
114
117
Transmitter
Signal Element
Timing
Local modem sends an internally generated transmit timing signal to
local terminal to synchronize transmitted data (TXD). See
Clock=Internal.
16
—
Standby Indicator (Models 3261/3263/3266/3268 only.) Signal passed from modem to
terminal indicating type of line in use. When signal is on, modem is on
a dial line. When signal is off, modem is on a leased line. This signal is
used in Restoral mode only.
17 DD
115
141
—
Receive Signal
Element Timing
Timing signal extracted from the received carrier. Local modem
transmits this signal to the DTE to synchronize received data (RXD).
18
—
Local Analog
Loopback Test
Initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem, causing it to
initiate local analog loopback test.
19
—
—
Not used.
20 CD
108.1/
108.2
Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
108.1—Sent by DTE; causes the modem to connect to the phone line.
108.2—Sent by DTE; allows the modem to connect to the phone line.
21
—
140
Remote Digital
Loopback Test
Signal initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem, causing it
to initiate remote digital loopback test (V.54 Loop 2).
22 CE
125
Ring Indicator
(RI)
Passed from local modem to local terminal. On during ringing, off
between rings and when no ring received.
23 CH/CI
111/112
Data Signal Rate CI passed from modem to terminal indicating signaling rate. CI is set
Select/Indicator
high for data rates greater than 2400 bps; otherwise, it is set low. CI is
also set low while the modem is disconnected. The function of this pin
is determined by the setting of rear panel Switch 1. CH (input) signal
has no effect on modem operation.
24 DA
113
142
External Signal
Element Timing
Transmit timing signal generated by some synchronous DTEs,
providing clock to the local modem. See Clock=External setting.
25
—
Test Indicate (TI) Local modem signals to local terminal when local modem is in test.
The terminal can initiate a Busy Out condition on this circuit. The
status of this signal is determined by the status of rear panel Switch 2
and front panel option DTE Pin 25 configured for Test or Busy.
Cabling and Interface Pinouts B-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITU Recommendation V.35 Modem-to-Computer Interface
For compatibility with DTEs operating with a V.35 interface, the 326XFAST-
SDC Series Modem supports an optional ITU Recommendation V.35 Modem-
to-Computer interface. Connection is made through the modem’s DTE port
NOTE: The 326XFAST-SDC Series Modem with a V.35 interface is currently
available in the U. S. A. and Canada.
Caution
The 326XFAST-SDC Series Modem, if ordered with ITU’s V.35
Recommendation, supports connection to external equipment also
operating with a V.35 electrical interface. If your DTE does not
have a V.35 interface, do not, under any circumstances, connect the
modem to a non-V.35 device. I fyou make such a connection, you
may seriously damage the modem. Telenetics makes no guarantee
of the equipment’s integrity if you do not ensure that compatible
interfaces are used. If your DTE does not have a V.35 interface, use
an external converter cable.
I
O
DIAL
LINE
PHONE
NC
1 ON 6
DTE
V.35
OUT
IN
Factory Preset 6-Position DIP to Off(Up)
Figure B-1. 326XFAST-SDC Series Modem with ITU V.35 Interface
NOTES:
1) The modem is configured at the factory for an EIA/TIA 232-D interface or
ITU rate V.35, and is shipped according to what you specify. Both interfaces
are not available in the same unit.
2) When operating with the V.35 interface, switch S1 must be set to the off (up)
position.
B-4 Cabling and Interface Pinouts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITU Rate V.35 Modem-to-Computer Interface Pinouts
The modem’s digital interface conforms to ITU Rate V.35. The modem should be
connected to a data terminal with a compatible digital interface (seeTable B-1).
Table B-2.
ITU V.35 Modem/Computer Interface Connections
Pin V.35 Signal
Definition
1
2
Frame Ground
Frame (or protective) ground.
Transmit Data (A) Digital data transmitted from the local terminal to the remote
modem.
3
4
5
6
7
8
Receive Data (A) Demodulated data received by the local terminal from the
remote modem.
Request To Send
(RTS)
Sent from local terminal to local modem to ready it for data
transmission.
Clear To Send
(CTS)
Passes from the local modem to the local terminal when the data
port is clear to transmit data. Occurs in response toRTS.
Data Set Ready
(DSR)
Indicates the local modem is ready to transmit and receive data.
Signal Ground
Common signal. Provides a common ground reference point for
interface circuitry.
Data Carrier
Detect (DCD)
Passed from the local modem to the local DTE when an
acceptable carrier signal is received by the modem.
9
—
—
—
Not Used.
Not Used.
Not Used.
10
11
12 Receive Clock (B) Timing signal extracted from the received carrier. Local modem
transmits this signal to the DTE to synchronize received data.
13 Transmit Clock
(B)
Local modem sends an internally generated transmit timing
signal to the local terminal to synchronize transmitted data.
14 Transmit Data (B) Digital data transmitted from the local terminal to the remote
modem.
15 Transmit Clock
(A)
Local modem sends an internally generated transmit timing
signal to the local terminal to synchronize transmitted data.
16 Receive Data (B) Demodulated data received by the local terminal from the
remote modem.
17 Receive Clock (A) Timing signal extracted from the received carrier. Local modem
transmits this signal to the DTE to synchronize received data.
18 Loop 3 Control
Initiated at the local terminal and passed to local modem,
causing it to initiate a local analog loopback test.
19
—
Not Used.
20 Data Terminal
Ready (DTR)
108.1—Sent by the DTE, this signal causes connection of the
modem to the phone line.
108.2—Sent by the DTE, this signal allows connection of the
modem to the phone line.
Cabling and Interface Pinouts B-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table B-2.
ITU V.35 Modem/Computer Interface Connections (Continued)
Pin V.35 Signal
Definition
21 Loop 2 Control
Signal initiated at local terminal and passed to local modem,
causing it to initiate remote digital loopback test (V.54 Loop 2).
22 Ring Indicator (RI) Passed from local modem to local terminal. On during ringing,
off between rings and when no ring received.
23 External Transmit Transmit timing signal generated by some synchronous DTEs,
Clock (B)
24 External Transmit Transmit timing signal generated by some synchronous DTEs,
Clock (A) providing clock to the local modem.
providing clock to the local modem.
25 Test Indicate (TI) Local modem signals to local terminal when local modem is in
test. The terminal can initiate a Busy Out condition on this
circuit.
Differences, EIA/TIA 232-D and ITU RateV.35 Interfaces
There are some differences in how your modem operates when using EIA/TIA
232-D and ITU Rate V.35 electrical interfaces. These differences, and settings
to use when operating witha V.35 interface, are as follows.
When a V.35 Electrical
Interface is Selected...
The Following Options
Cannot Be Selected...
Set:
Pin 11 is not supported.
Mode=External
Mode=
(AT CA2)
Originate (AT CA0)
*
*
Answer (AT CA1), or
*
Auto (AT CA3)
*
Pin 12 is not supported
Pin 13 is not supported
Pin 14 is not supported
—NA—
—NA—
—NA—
—NA—
Ext Cntrl=Pin 14
Ext Cntrl=Pin 20
(AT OC0)
(AT OC1—default).
*
*
Restore=FP/116
—NA—
(AT RE3)
*
Restore=FP/116.ACU
(AT RE6)
*
—NA—
Pin 16 is not supported
Pin 23 is not supported
—NA—
—NA—
Switch S1 on modem rear
panel to the Off (up) position.
DIAL LINE, LEASE (PRIVATE) LINE, PHONE Connector Pinouts
DIAL LINE, LEASE (PRIVATE) LINE, and PHONE connector pinouts vary by
B-6 Cabling and Interface Pinouts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NC (Network Control) Port Pinouts
Table B-3 describes the pinouts for the IN and OUT NC (Network Control) ports.
Table B-3.
Network Control Port Connector Pinouts
Pin
1
In
Out
Not Connected
TXD In
User Special In
TXD Out
2
3
RXD In
RXD Out
4
RTS In
RTS Out
5
Not Connected
Not Connected
Ground
Not Connected
User Special Out
Ground
6
7
8
DCD In
DCD Out
“In” signals use a DCE-type interface. This type of interface connects directly to the
DTE-type interface provided by Telenetics’ Network Management Systems.
“Out” signals use a DTE-type interface. This type of interface may connect to a Telenetics
or Motorola network-managed product.
Cabling
This section provides important information about cabling and operating the modem
at DTE rates greater than 19.2 kbps.
NOTE: 326XFAST and 326XFAST-SDC Series Modems are referred to as 326X
Series Modems here.
Caution
When operating the modem at DTE rates higher than 19.2
kbps, carefully follow the information here to determine the
cables to use with your application. For the modem to operate
as specified, Telenetics has indicated the maximum capaci-
tance of cables to be used when operating at data rates higher
than 19.2 kbps. If this method is not followed, your modem
may cause errors in data transmission. Telenetics makes no
guarantee of proper modem operation if you do not use a cable
with the correct capacitance.
Cable Considerations
Telenetics has specified a maximum allowable cable capacitance for use with the
expanded data rates of 326X modems.Yo umust determine the correct capacitance
of the cable you intend to use with the modem.
Cabling and Interface Pinouts B-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table B-4 shows a range of data rates and maximum allowable capacitances. The
maximum capacitance is a total of the inter-conductor capacitance (between the
Table B-4.
Maximum Cable Capacitance per Data Rate
Data Rate
(kbps)
Maximum Cable Capacitance (Cc+Cs) in
Pico Farads (pF)*
0-20.0
2400 pF
900 pF
400 pF
200 pF
20.0-64.0
64.0-96.0
115.2
Notes:
*(1) The total capacitance in this column is the total allowable cable capacitance.
(2) Maximum resistance of cable conductors is 25 Ohms.
The maximum allowable cable capacitance decreases as DTE rates increase. The
more capacitance in the cable, the shorter the allowable length at a DTE rate.
Similarly, the allowable lengths become shorter as DTE rates increase.
Since newer PCs support EIA 232-D type receivers/drivers at higher rates, you must
use information in this section to determine cable length.
To determine the per foot capacitance of your cable:
1) Determine the length of the cable you require for your application.
2) Determine the range of rates that the modem will use. (For example, to
routinely operate the modem's DTE port between 20.0 and 96.0 kbps,
determine the cable capacitance for the higher rate. You can operate the
modem up to, but not exceeding, the maximum rate capacitance that you
calculate.)
rate. (For example, to operate the modem at 64.0 kbps, the maximum
capacitance is 900 pF.)
4) Divide the maximum cable capacitance by the length of the cable. This results
in the total cable capacitance per foot. The formula below illustrates how to
calculate the per-foot capacitance:
Maximum Cable Capacitance (pF)
Maximum Cable Capacitance (pF)
=
per Foot
Total Cable Length in Feet
B-8 Cabling and Interface Pinouts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For example, assume you require a 30-foot cable. You intend to operate your
maximum capacitance for the cable is 900 pF. According to the formula above,
divide 900 pF by 30 feet. The result is 30 pF per foot:
900 pF
= 30 pF/ft
30 ft
Telenetics recommends you use Telenetics cables to attach your 326X modem(s) to
length versus DTE rates for 326X stand-alone units. NOTE: The part numbers
with the correct capacitance to support the higher rates of the 326X Modem.
Table B-5.
Telenetics DB-25 Low Capacitance Cables for 326X
Telenetics
Product
Code
Up to 19.2 Up to 64.0 Up to 96.0 Up to 115.2
Description
kbps (ft)
kpbs (ft)
kbps (ft)
kbps (ft)
Telenetics
Male 25-Male 25
Straight-through
92153
92152
92151
92150
92157
92156
92155
92154
92161
92160
92159
92158
50
30
10
6
Telenetics
Male 25-Female 25
Straight-Through
50
50
30
30
10
10
6
6
Telenetics
Male 25-Female 25
Crossover
NOTE: Telenetics DB-25 Cables have a conductor capacitance of 11 pF/ft and a shield
capacitance of 20 pF/ft for a total capacitance of 31 pF/ft. For example, operating at 19.2
kbps, a 50-ft length of cable multiplied by a total capacitance of 31 pF/ft yields a maximum
Cabling and Interface Pinouts B-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table B-6.
Vendor Wire for 326X
Conductor
Shield
Up to
Part
Capacitance Capacitance Up to 19.2 Up to 64.0 Up to 96.0 115.2
Vendor
Number
(pF)
35
(pF)
63
kbps (ft) kbps (ft) kbps (ft) kbps (ft)
Belden
9948
24.49
28.24
69.57
70.59
77.42
9.18
4.08
2.04
2.35
5.80
5.88
6.45
9671
30
55
10.59
26.09
26.47
29.03
4.71
8125
12.5
12
22
11.59
11.76
12.90
9937
22
8155
11
20
Manhattan
M39026
M13201
M2414
M3431
M2434
33
65
50
47
22
22
24.49
30
9.18
4.08
2.04
2.50
2.74
5.80
5.88
30
11.25
12.33
26.09
26.47
5.00
26
32.88
69.57
70.59
5.48
12.5
12
11.59
11.76
Madison
25QF10BTI 14.6
25QF15BTI 12.4
26.3
22.4
58.68
68.97
22
9.78
4.89
5.75
25.86
11.49
NOTE: To determine cable length, add the conductor and shield capacitance specified above to determine the total
wire capacitance. For example, if you are using a Belden wire (Part Number 9671), add the conductor capacitance of
30 pF/ft and the shield capacitance of 55 pF/ft for a total capacitance of 85 pF/ft. If you are operating at a rate of 19.2
kbps, the maximum allowable cable length to attain throughput of 19.2 kbps is 28.24 feet. Multiplying 28.24 by the
total cable capacitance of 85 pF/ft yields a maximum allowable cable capacitance of 2410.4 pF, which is acceptable in
accordance with Table B-4.
DTE Cable Diagnostics
This section helps determine whether there is a problem with a DTE cable. Perform
the following steps before continuing with installation. If you continue to experience
problems with data transmission after choosing a cable and running the diagnostics
in this section, the problem may be with your DTE or modem.
If the modem is not installed at a host site, perform the following steps:
1) Enable the AT ACU (if not already enabled) with async echo on (reinitializing
the modem will also enable the AT ACU with async echo set to on). Ensure
that rate and parity of the modem and the DTE are identical.
2) Send data to the modem from the DTE. NOTE: Do not substitute test
equipment for the DTE, as the DTE's receivers/drivers are used in this test.
3) If echoed data from the modem (as received by the DTE) matches the
transmitted message, send the status screen (AT ST<CR>) command.
*
4) If there are no errors in either of the previous tests, the cable is appropriate for
your application.
B-10 Cabling and Interface Pinouts
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5) If the transmitted and received messages are different (i.e., character or
framing errors), verify the cable length to the limit specified in Table B-4.
Reduce the cable length or capacitance of the cable to the theoretical limit and
retry the steps listed in this section. (If the same cable length is required, it is
recommended that a low capacitance type cable be used.)
If the modem is installed at a host site, perform the following steps:
1) Set the Mode option AT SM (EC/DC OPT'S category) to Reliable. (Reliable
*
mode ensures data is transmitted during this test.) NOTE: Do not initiate loop
tests while performing the diagnostic procedures in this section.
2) Follow Steps 1 to 3 in the section above to verify the cable at a remote site.
3) Once the cable at the remote site has been verified, initiate a dial connection
with the host site.
4) If there are no errors in data transmission, the cable at the host site is most
likely appropriate for the application.
5) If the transmitted and received messages are different, the cable at the host site
is most likely incorrect for the application.Verify the cable length to the limit
the theoretical limit and retry Steps 1 to 3 in the section above. (If the same
cable length is required, it is recommended that a low capacitance type cable
be used.)
NOTE: These tests should be done prior to a Local Analog Loopback (LAL) or
Remote Digital Loopback (RDL) test when troubleshooting.
Cabling and Interface Pinouts B-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C
Country-Specific Information
Contents
Delayed and Forbidden Lists ........................................................................
Rear Panel Pinouts ...................................................................................
Telco Option (AT&J) ................................................................................
Country-Specific Information C-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Contents (Continued)
U. S. A. .........................................................................................................
Dial Line Jack Types ................................................................................
Rear Panel Pinouts ...................................................................................
Telco Option (AT&J) ................................................................................
Declaring The Jack Type ..............................................................................
C-2 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
This appendix provides information for operating the modem, by country, including:
• Restricted features summary, describing modem features that are restricted
or limited by regulatory agencies in some countries
• Installation Notes, containing information useful when installing the modem
in countries other than the U. S. A. and Canada
• Modem standalone rear panel views, and the countries supporting each view
• Modem rear panel interface pinouts
• Cables shipped to each country along with pinouts
• Delayed/Forbidden list operation in each country
• Country-specific information that applies only to: Canada, Denmark, Hong
Kong, the United Kingdom and the U. S. A.
Use the Universal International section if your country is not one of the following:
Australia
Belgium
Canada
France
Japan
Spain
Germany
Hong Kong
Malaysia
Netherlands
Norway
Sweden
Switzerland
United Kingdom
U. S. A.
Czech Republic Ireland
Denmark
Finland
Israel
Italy
Portugal
South Africa
NOTE: References to the 326X Series Modem apply to 326XV.32bis, 326X, and
326X-SDC Series Modems, unless stated otherwise.
Country Support
Country approval is an ongoing process. I fyou have questions about approval and
availability in your country, contact a Telenetics sales representative or distributor.
Country-Specific Information C-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation Notes
This section provides information useful when installing the modem in countries
other than the U. S. A. and Canada.
Models 3265/3266
Warning
Ports that are capable of connecting to other apparatus are
defined as SELV. To ensure conformity with EN60950 - ensure
that these ports are only connected to ports of the same type on
other apparatus.
Avertissement
Les ports qui sont susceptibles d’être connectés à des
équipements sont désignés comme TBTS. Pour garantir la
conformité à la norme EN 60950, n’interconnecte ces ports
qu’avec des ports du même type sur des autres matériels.
Warnung
Anschlusse, die mit anderen Geraten verbindet werden
konnen, sind als SELV beschrieben. Um Konformitat mit EN
60950 zu versichern, sichern Sie es, daß diese Anschlusse nur
mit den des selben Type auf anderen Geraten verbindet
werden.
All Models
These units are not suitable for connection to an IT power distribution system, nor
for use in a host device which is connected to an IT power distribution system.
C-4 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Restricted Features Summary
This section summarizes restricted features, by country, as follows:
• If an entry is blank, the feature is unrestricted.
• If an entry reads “Restricted,” the feature is not allowed.
• If the entry says that a feature is Always=x, the feature is enabled and cannot be
changed by the user. X is also the default option.
• If the entry shows front panel settings and AT command settings, only the listed
settings are allowed. (Settings not listed are restricted.)
In the following example, Answer can be set only to Manual (AT AA0), Ring
*
#1 (AT AA1), and Ring #2 (AT AA2). Other settings are restricted.
*
*
Setting
AT Command
Manual
Ring #1
Ring #2
AT AA0
*
AT AA1
*
AT AA2
*
NOTE: Refer to later sections in this appendix for information on using the
modem in the U. S. A.
Country-Specific Information C-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Canada
ATH
Test
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in 3265/6
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in all models
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in 3268
ATX
Always=4, ATX4
Call Progress
AT&D7
Restricted
108.2/Bsy
AT&G
Guard Tone
550
1800
in
AT&G1
AT&G2
3266/8
Always=1800 (AT&G1)
in 3265/67
550
1800
in:
AT&G1
AT&G2
3266/8
AT&J
Telco
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
AT&P
Always=33%, AT&P1
Always=40%, AT&P0
Always=33%, AT&P1
Pulse Cycle
AT AA
*
Manual
Ring #2
AT AA0 Manual
AT AA0 Manual
AT AA0
*
*
*
Answer
AT AA2 Ring #1
AT AA1 Ring #1
AT AA1
*
*
*
Ring #2
AT AA2 Ring #2
AT AA2
*
*
AT BD
*
Always=4 sec
Always=4 sec
Restricted
Blind Dial
AT BD1
AT BD1
*
*
AT CD
*
7 sec
AT CD2
*
Loss Dis
3 sec
AT CD1
*
AT DD
*
Always=6 sec
6 sec
4 sec
3 sec
AT DD3 Always=20 sec
*
2 sec
4 sec
6 sec
S7
AT DD0
*
AT DD9
*
Dial Wait
AT DD3
AT DD2 AT DD6
AT DD2
*
*
*
*
AT DD1
AT DD3
*
*
AT DP
*
Always=4 sec
Pause Delay
AT DR
*
Off
1
2
AT DR0 Off
Off
AT DR0
*
AT DR0
*
*
AT DR1
*
Auto Redial
AT DR1
1
2
1
2
3
AT DR1
*
*
AT DR2
*
AT DR2
*
AT DR2
*
3
AT DR3 ...
AT DR3
*
...
*
8
AT DR8
*
AT LL
*
Restricted in 3265/6
Restricted in 3265/6
Always=72 ms
Restricted
Restricted in 3268
Restricted in 3268
LAL Busy Out
AT LN
*
Restricted
DTE Pin 25
AT TL
*
Always=72 ms
AT TL0
Always=72 ms
AT TL0
Tone Length
AT TL0
*
*
*
AT TT
*
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
45 sec
AT TT0
*
*
*
*
Call Timeout
AT TT2
AT TT2
AT TT2
AT TT1
*
*
*
*
DL TX Level
Always=-10dBm
Always=-9dBm
Always=-6dBm
Not supported. Select dial
line transmit level using
Telco option (TELCO
OPTS menu)
LL TX Level
Always=-13dBm
Always=-9dBm
Always=-6dBm
Set to 0dBm; adjustable
from
0 to -15 dBm
C-6 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Czech Republic and
Poland
Feature
Denmark
Finland
France
ATH
Test
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in all models
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in Rel. 4.0 &
earlier; not restricted in
Rel. 4.1 & later
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in all models
ATX
Call Progress
Always=4, ATX4
Always=4, ATX4
Restricted
AT&D7
108.2/Bsy
AT&G
Guard Tone
AT&G0
AT&G1
AT&G2
550
1800
AT&J
Telco
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
AT&P
Pulse Cycle
Always=33%
AT&P1
Restricted
Always=40%
AT&P0
AT AA
*
Manual
Ring #1
Ring #2
Using S0
AT AA0
*
Always=33%
AT&P1
Manual
Ring #2
Using S0
AT AA0
*
Answer
AT AA1
*
AT AA2
*
AT AA2
*
AT AA5
*
AT AA5
*
AT BD
*
2sec
4sec
AT BD0
*
Manual
Ring #2
AT AA0
*
AT AA2
Blind Dial
AT BD1
*
*
AT CD
*
Restricted
Loss Dis
AT DD
*
2 sec
4 sec
6 sec
Using S7
AT DD1 2 sec
AT DD2 4 sec
AT DD0
*
Off
3 sec
AT CD0
4 sec
6 sec
15 sec
Using S7
AT DD2
*
*
*
AT CD1
Dial Wait
AT DD2
*
AT DD3
*
*
*
AT DD3 6 sec
*
AT DD3
*
AT DD6
AT DD5
*
AT DD9 15 sec
AT DD5
AT DD9
*
*
*
20 sec
*
AT DP
*
Always=3 sec
6 sec
12 sec
AT DD3
*
AT DD4
Pause Delay
*
AT DR
*
Off
1
2
...
8
3 sec
6 sec
9 sec
12 sec
AT DP0
AT DR0
Off
1
2
...
8
AT DR0
*
*
*
AT DR1
*
AT DP1
Auto Redial
AT DR1
*
*
AT DP2
AT DR2
AT DR2
*
*
*
AT DP3
...
...
*
AT DR8
AT DR8
*
*
AT LL
*
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
LAL Busy Out
AT LN
*
DTE Pin 25
AT TL
*
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
AT TL0
Tone Length
AT TL0
AT TL0
AT TL0
*
*
*
*
AT TT
*
30 sec
60sec
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
45 sec
60 sec
AT TT1
AT TT0
*
30 sec
AT TT0
*
*
*
AT TT3
*
AT TT2
Call Timeout
AT TT2
AT TT3
*
60 sec
*
*
90 sec
Using S7
AT TT2
*
90 sec
Using S7
AT TT2
*
AT TT5
*
AT TT5
*
DL TX Level
LL TX Level
Always=-11dBm
Always=-11dBm
Always=-10dBm
Always=-13dBm
Always=-9 dBm
Always=-11 dBm
Always=-11 dBm
Always=0 dBm
Country-Specific Information C-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Germany
Hong Kong
Ireland
Israel
ATH
Test
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted all models†
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in 3265/6
ATX
Call Progress
AT&D7
Restricted
108.2/Bsy
AT&G
Guard Tone
550
1800
in:
AT&G1
AT&G2
3265/7
Always=1800 (AT&G2)
in 3266/8
AT&J
Telco
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
AT&P
Pulse Cycle
Always=40%
AT&P0
Always=33%
AT&P1
Always=33%
AT&P1
Always=40%
AT&P0
AT AA
Answer
Manual
Ring #1
Ring #2
Ring #4
AT AA0 Manual
AT AA0
Manual
Ring #1
Ring #2
AT AA0 Manual
AT AA0
*
*
*
*
*
AT AA1 Ring #2
AT AA2
AT AA1
Ring #2
AT AA2
*
*
*
*
AT AA2
AT AA2
*
*
AT AA4
*
AT BD
2 sec
4 sec
AT BD0
*
*
Blind Dial
AT BD1
*
AT CD
Off
3 sec
7 sec
AT CD0
*
*
Loss Dis
AT CD1
*
AT CD2
*
AT DD
2 sec
4 sec
6 sec
15 sec
20 sec
AT DD0 Always=6 sec
3 sec
4 sec
6 sec
AT DD1 2 sec
AT DD1
*
*
*
*
Dial Wait
AT DD2 AT DD3
AT DD2
4 sec
6 sec
Using S7
AT DD2
*
*
*
*
AT DD3
AT DD3
*
AT DD3
*
*
AT DD5
AT DD9
*
*
AT DD6
*
AT DP
*
Pause Delay
AT DR
Off
AT DR0
Off
1
2
AT DR0
*
*
*
Auto Redial
1
2
3
AT DR1
AT DR1
*
*
AT DR2
AT DR2
*
*
AT DR3
3
AT DR3
*
*
AT LL
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted in 3265/6
Restricted in 3265/6
Always=72 ms
*
LAL Busy Out
AT LN
Restricted in 3265/6/8
*
DTE Pin 25
AT TL
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
AT TL0
Always=72 ms
AT TL0
*
Tone Length
AT TL0
AT TL0
*
*
*
*
AT TT
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
90 sec
180 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
*
*
*
*
*
AT TT3
*
Call Timeout
AT TT2
AT TT2
AT TT2
*
*
*
AT TT3
90 sec
Using S7
AT TT2
*
*
AT TT4
AT TT5
*
*
DL TX Level
LL TX Level
Always=-10dBm
Always=-6dBm
Always=-9dBm
Always=-8dBm
Always=-12dBm
Always=-9 dBm
Always=0 dBm
Always=-11dBm
† NOTE: If you issue the ATD command without an attached telephone number, the modem responds: ERROR.
C-8 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Italy
Japan
Malaysia
Netherlands
ATH
Test
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted all models
ATX
Always=4
Call Progress
ATX4
AT&D7
Restricted
108.2/Bsy
AT&G
Restricted
Guard Tone
AT&J
Telco
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
AT&P
Pulse Cycle
Always=38%
AT&P2
Always=33%
AT&P1
Always=33%
AT&P1
Always=38%
AT&P2
AT AA
*
Manual
Ring #2
Ring #4
AT AA0
*
Answer
AT AA2
*
AT AA4
*
AT BD
*
4 Sec
Using S6
AT BD1 Always=4 sec
*
Restricted
Blind Dial
AT BD2 AT BD1
*
*
AT CD
*
Loss Dis
AT DD
*
4 sec
6 sec
15 sec
Using S7
AT DD2 3 sec
AT DD1 2 sec
AT DD1 15 sec
AT DD2 30 sec
AT DD3 40 sec
AT DD5
*
*
*
*
Dial Wait
AT DD3 4 sec
AT DD2 4 sec
AT DD7
*
*
*
*
AT DD5 6 sec
AT DD3 6 sec
AT DD8
*
*
*
*
AT DD9
Using S7
AT DD9
*
*
AT DP
*
Always=3 sec
Pause Delay
AT DR
*
Off
1
2
3
4
AT DR0 Off
AT DR0 Off
AT DR0
*
*
*
*
AT DR1
*
Auto Redial
AT DR1
1
2
AT DR1
AT DR2 ...
1
*
*
AT DR2
*
...
AT DR3
*
8
AT DR8
*
AT DR4
*
AT LL
*
Restricted
Restricted
LAL Busy Out
AT LN
*
DTE Pin 25
AT TL
*
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
AT TL0
Always=72 ms
Tone Length
AT TL0
AT TL0
AT TL0
*
*
*
*
AT TT
*
30 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
45 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
*
AT TT5
*
*
AT TT1
*
*
AT TT3
*
Call Timeout
Using S7
90 sec
Using S7
AT TT2
*
AT TT5
*
AT PT
*
Dial=Auto
Restricted
Dial
DL TX Level
Set to -15dBm; adjustable
from 0 to -15 dBm
Always=-9 dBm
Always=-13 dBm
Always=-9 dBm
Always=0 dBm
Always=-6dBm
LL TX Level
Set to 0dBm; adjustable
from 0 to -15 dBm
Always=-6dBm
Country-Specific Information C-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Norway
Portugal
South Africa
Spain
ATH
Test
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in all models
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in all models
ATX
Always=4, ATX4
Call Progress
AT&D7
Restricted
Restricted
108.2/Bsy
AT&G
Guard Tone
Restricted
Always=1800 (AT&G1)
Models 3265/7
550
1800
in:
AT&G1
AT&G2
3266/8
AT&J
Telco
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
AT&P
Always=40%, AT&P0
Always=33%, AT&P1
Always=33%, AT&P1
Always=33%, AT&P1
Pulse Cycle
AT AA
*
Manual
Ring #1
Ring #2
Using S0
AT AA0
*
Manual
Ring #2
AT AA0
*
Answer
AT AA1
*
AT AA2
*
AT AA2
*
AT AA5
*
AT BD
*
Restricted
Always=4 sec
Restricted
Blind Dial
AT BD1
*
AT CD
*
Off
3 sec
7 sec
AT CD0
*
3 sec
7 sec
AT CD1
*
Loss Dis
AT CD1
*
AT CD2
*
AT CD2
*
AT DD
*
2 sec
4 sec
6 sec
15 sec
20 sec
AT DD0 2 sec
AT DD0 Always=6 sec
3 sec
4 sec
6 sec
AT DD1
*
*
*
Dial Wait
AT DD2 4 sec
AT DD2 AT DD3
AT DD2
*
*
*
*
AT DD3 6 sec
AT DD3
AT DD3
*
*
*
AT DD5 Using S7
AT DD9
*
*
AT DD6
*
AT DP
*
Always=4 sec
Pause Delay
AT DR
*
Off
1
AT DR0 Off
AT DR0
*
*
Auto Redial
AT DR1
1
2
3
4
AT DR1
*
*
2
3
AT DR2
*
AT DR2
*
AT DR3
*
AT DR3
*
AT DR4
*
AT LL
*
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
LAL Busy Out
AT LN
*
Restricted
DTE Pin 25
AT TL
*
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
AT TL0
Always=72 ms
Tone Length
AT TL0
AT TL0
AT TL0
*
*
*
*
AT TT
*
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
*
AT TT2
*
*
AT TT2
*
*
AT TT2
*
Call Timeout
DL TX Level
LL TX Level
Always=-10dBm
Always=-10dBm
Always=-9dBm
Always=0dBm
Always=-11dBm
Always=-6dBm
Always=-9 dBm
Always=-13 dBm
C-10 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Feature
Sweden
Switzerland
United Kingdom
Universal
ATH
Test
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted in Rel. 4.0 and
earlier; not restricted in
Rel. 4.1 and later
Test=Busy Out (ATH1)
Restricted
ATX
Always=4 ATX4
Always=4 (ATX4)
Call Progress
AT&D7
108.2/Bsy
AT&G
Guard Tone
550
1800
in:
AT&G1
AT&G2
3265/7
Always=1800 (AT&G2)
in 3266/8
AT&J
Telco
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
Restricted
AT&P
Pulse Cycle
Always=40%
AT&P0
Always=33%
AT&P1
AT AA
*
Manual
Ring #2
AT AA0
*
Answer
AT AA2
*
AT BD
*
Restricted
Always=4 sec
Blind Dial
AT BD1
*
AT CD
*
Loss Dis
AT DD
*
15 sec
30 sec
40 sec
AT DD5 6 sec
AT DD7 12 sec
AT DD3 Always=6 seconds
*
2 sec AT DD0
*
*
Dial Wait
AT DD4 AT DD3
4 sec AT DD2
*
*
*
*
6 sec AT DD3
*
AT DD8
*
S7 AT DD9
*
AT DP
*
Always=3 sec
Always=4 sec
Pause Delay
AT DR
*
Off
1
2
AT DR0
*
AT DR3
*
Auto Redial
AT DR1
*
AT DR2
*
3
AT LL
*
Restricted
LAL Busy Out
AT LN
*
Restricted
DTE Pin 25
AT TL
*
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
Always=72 ms
Tone Length
AT TL0
AT TL0
AT TL0
AT TL0
*
*
*
*
AT TT
*
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
*
30 sec
60 sec
AT TT0
AT TT2
*
*
Call Timeout
AT TT2
AT TT2
*
*
*
DL TX Level
Always=-13dBm
Always=-9dBm
Always=-9dBm
Set to -9dBm; adjustable
from
0 to -15 dBm
Always=-13dBm
Always=-6dBm
Always=-13dBm
Set to 0dBm; adjustable
from
LL TX Level
0 to -15 dBm
Country-Specific Information C-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Operating Notes
This section summarizes useful operating information.
• Restricted front panel option settings do not appear in front panel menus
• PC software communication packages often send fixed initialization strings to
the modem (via AT commands). These strings do not account for country-
specific modem restrictions.
To make software communication package installation easier, the modem
responds as follows:
— If you enter a restricted AT, AT , or AT& command for an option that is
*
completely restricted, the modem displays OK instead of ERROR. The
modem, does not, however, modify its configuration in this case.
IMPORTANT: The command does not change the modem
configuration. An OK lets the software package continue
communication with the modem. Some software packages may be
affected by this new functionality. Telenetics recommends that you
change the initialization string of your software communication
package for the restricted options or option settings that may apply
in your country. Refer to the software package documentation for
further information.
— If you enter a restricted AT, AT , or AT& command for an option that
*
has some restricted settings, the modem displays ERROR
— If you enter a restricted V.25 bis command, the modem responds with the
INValid message, INV
Standalone Modem Rear Panel Views
This section shows rear panel views for models 3260, 3261, 3265, and 3266.
Following each illustration is a list of the countries that use that modem version.
NOTE: For Models 3262, 3263, 3267 and 3268, the addendum, 326X Series Modem
Cards (shipped with the modem backplane), contains enclosure card and backplane
information.
C-12 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3260 Dial Only Modem
3260 Modem Rear Panel (Dial Only)
Figure C-1 shows the rear panel of the 3260 dial only modem. This version is used
in:
• U. S. A. (Model 3260)
• Canada (Model 3265)
• Japan (Model 3265)
DIAL
LINE
PHONE
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Figure C-1. Rear Panel Layout - 3260 (Dial Only)
3261 Modem Rear View (Leased Line, Dial Restoral)
Figure C-2 shows the rear panel view of the 3261 leased line modem with dial
restoral. This version is used in:
• U. S. A. (Model 3261)
• Canada (Model 3266)
• Japan (Model 3266)
NOTE: 326X Series Modems for Canada and Japan are identical to Model 3261 for
the U. S. A. The model number of the modem for Canada and Japan is 3266. Canada
and Japan are included in this section with the view of the U.S.A. 3261 modem.
PHONE
LEASE
LINE
DIAL
LINE
NC
1
2
3
4
5
6
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Figure C-2. Rear Panel Layout - 3261 (Leased Line with Dial Restoral)
Country-Specific Information C-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3265 Dial Only Modem
This section shows rear panel views of the 3265 dial only modem, and the countries
using the layout.
3265 Modem Rear Panel—View A
Figure C-3 shows View A of the 3265 Modem. This version is used in:
• Australia
• Belgium
• Czech Republic
• Denmark
• Finland
• Ireland
• Israel
• Italy
• Malaysia
• Netherlands
• Norway
• Portugal
• South Africa
• Spain
• Universal International
DIAL
LINE
PHONE
NC
1 ON 6
DTE
OUT
IN
Figure C-3. View A Rear Panel Layout - 3265 (Dial Only)
C-14 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3265 Modem Rear Panel—View B
Figure C-4 shows View B of the 3265 Modem. This version is used in Germany and
Austria.
DIAL
LINE
NC
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Figure C-4. View B Rear Panel Layout - 3265 (Dial Only)
3265 Modem Rear Panel—View C
Figure C-5 shows View C of the 3265 Modem. This version is used in Hong Kong
and the United Kingdom.
DIAL
LINE
PHONE
1 ON 6
NC
DTE
OUT
IN
Figure C-5. View C Rear Panel Layout - 3265 (Dial Only)
3265 Modem Rear Panel—View D
Figure C-6 shows View D of the 3265 Modem. This version is used in France,
Sweden, and Switzerland.
DIAL
LINE
NC
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Figure C-6. View D Rear Panel Layout - 3265 (Dial Only)
Country-Specific Information C-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3266 Modem (Leased Line with Dial Restoral)
This section shows three rear panel views of the 3266 leased line modem with dial
restoral, and the countries using the layout.
3266 Modem Rear Panel—View A
Figure C-7 shows View A of the 3266 Modem. This version is used in:
• Australia
• Belgium
• Czech Republic
• Denmark
• Finland
• France
• Ireland
• Israel
• Italy
• Malaysia
• Netherlands
• Norway
• Portugal
• South Africa
• Spain
• Sweden
• Switzerland
• Universal International
DIAL
LINE
PRIVATE
LINE
NC
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Figure C-7. View A Rear Panel Layout - 3266 (Leased Line with Dial Restoral)
C-16 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3266 Modem Rear Panel—View B
Figure C-8 shows View B of the 3266 Modem. This version is used in Germany and
Austria.
DIAL
LINE
PRIVATE
LINE
NC
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Figure C-8. View B Rear Panel Layout - 3266 (Leased Line with Dial Restoral)
3266 Modem Rear Panel—View C
Figure C-9 shows View C of the 3266 Modem. This version is used in Hong Kong
and the United Kingdom.
DIAL
LINE
PRIVATE
LINE
NC
DTE
1 ON 6
OUT
IN
Figure C-9. View C Rear Panel Layout - 3266 (Leased Line with Dial Restoral)
For an Illustration of the Enclosure Card Backplane...
Refer to the addendum, 326X Series Modem Cards, shipped with the backplane.
Country-Specific Information C-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Panel Interface Pinouts
This section shows the rear panel interface pinouts for the modem stand-alone
models 3260, 3261, 3265, and 3266, and enclosure card models 3262, 3263,
3267, and 3268.
Standalone Models 3260/65 and 3261/66 Interface Pinouts
This section shows the pinouts for the standalone modem’s rear panel connectors.
Dial Line Interface (Models 3260/3265)
Dial line connection is made via the DIAL LINE interface on the modem’s rear
Table C-1.
Dial Line Interface (Models 3260/3265)
Dial Line
Canada/
Hong Kong/
United Kingdom
Germany/
Austria
All Other
Countries
Connector Pin U. S. A.*
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MB
MB1
MI
Not Used
Telset B
LA
Not Used
Not Used
Telset Ring
Ring
Not Used
Ring Indicator
LB
Bell Shunt
Not Used
Telset A
Ring
Tip
b2
Tip
MIC
PR
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
a2
Telset Tip
Not Used
Not Used
PC
*Refer to Canada/U. S. A. country-specific sections for rear panel pinouts cross-referenced with telco
jack selections.
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3260/3265)
2-wire leased line connections are made via the DIAL LINE interface on the rear
Table C-2.
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3260/3265)
Leased Line
Canada/
Hong Kong/
Germany/
All Other
Countries
Connector Pin U. S. A.*
United Kingdom Austria
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Not Used
B
LA
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Not Used
Not Used
LB
Not Used
Not Used
A
Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
*Refer to Canada/U. S. A. country-specific sections for rear panel pinouts cross-referenced with telco
jack selections.
C-18 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phone Connector Interface (Models 3260/3265)
Connection to an external telephone can be made using the PHONE connector on the
Table C-3.
Phone Line Interface (Models 3260/3265)
Phone Line
Connector Pin
Canada/
U. S. A.*
Hong Kong/
United Kingdom
All Other
Countries
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not Connected
Not Connected
MI
Not Used
B
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Telset Ring
Telset Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Bell Shunt
Not Used
A
Ring
Tip
MIC
Not Used
Not Connected
Not Connected
*Refer to Canada/U. S. A. country-specific sections for rear panel pinouts cross-referenced with telco
jack selections.
Dial Line Interface (Models 3261/3266)
Dial line connection is made via the DIAL LINE interface on the modem’s rear
Table C-4.
Dial Line Interface (Models 3261/3266)
Dial Line
Connector Canada/ Germany/ Hong Kong/
All Other
Countries
Pin
U. S. A.
Austria
United Kingdom Japan
1
2
3
MB
LA
Not Used
B
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Telset Ring
MB1
M1
Not Used
Ring
Bell Shunt
Indicator
4
5
6
7
8
Ring
Tip
LB
Telset Ring
A
Ring
Ring
b2
Tip
Tip
MIC
PR
Not Used
Not Used
a2
Telset Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Telset Tip
Not Used
Not Used
PC
Country-Specific Information C-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3261/3266)
2-wire leased line connections are made via the LEASE LINE interface on the
Table C-5.
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3261/3266)
Leased Line
Canada/
Germany/ Hong Kong/
All Other
Countries
Connector Pin U. S. A.
Austria
United Kingdom Japan
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ring
Tip
Tip
Ring
Tip
Ring
Tip
Tip
Ring
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Ring
Not Used Tip
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
4-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3261/3266)
4-wire leased line connections are made via the LEASE LINE interface on the
Table C-6.
4-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3261/3266)
Leased Line
Connector
Pin
Canada/ Germany/ Hong Kong/
All Other
U. S. A.
TX Ring
TX Tip
Austria
United Kingdom Japan
Countries
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX Tip
TX Tip
TX Ring
TX Tip
TX Ring
TX Tip
TX Ring
Not Used
Not Used
RX Tip
RX Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
RX Tip
Not Used
Not Used
RX Ring
TX Ring
Not Used RX Tip
Not Used TX Ring
Not Used TX Tip
Not Used RX Ring
RX Ring
Not Used
Not Used
RX Tip
RX Tip
RX Ring
RX Ring RX Ring
C-20 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phone Connector Interface (Models 3261/3266)
Connection to an external telephone can be made using the PHONE connector on the
Table C-7.
Phone Line Interface (Models 3261/326)
Phone Line
Connector Pin
Canada/U. S. A.
Not Connected
Not Connected
MI
Japan
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Telset Ring
Telset Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Tip
MIC
Not Connected
Not Connected
Card Models 3262/67, 3263/68 Backplane Interface Pinouts
Dial Line Interface (All Card Models)
Dial line connection is made via the DIAL LINE A and DIAL LINE B interfaces.
Table C-8 describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts.
Table C-8.
Dial Line Interface (All Card Models)
Dial Line A and
Dial Line B
Connector Pin
Hong Kong/
South Africa/
United Kingdom
All Other
Countries
Canada/U. S. A.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MB
MB1
MI
Not Used
U.K. Bell
Telset Ring
Ring
Not Used
Not Used
Telset Ring
Ring
Ring
Tip
Tip
Tip
MIC
PR
Telset Tip
Not Connected
Not Connected
Telset Tip
Not Used
Not Used
PC
Country-Specific Information C-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3262/3267)
2-wire leased line connections are made via the 2W LEASE interface for modem A,
leased line interface pinouts.
Table C-9.
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3262/3267)
2-Wire Lease and
2- and 4-Wire Lease
Connector Pin
Hong Kong/
South Africa/
Canada/U. S. A. United Kingdom
All Other
Countries
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Tip
Tip
Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3263/3268)
2-wire leased line connections are made via the 2W/4W LEASE interface.
Table C-10 describes 2-wire leased line interface pinouts.
Table C-10.
2-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3263/3268)
Hong Kong/
2- and 4-Wire Lease
Connector Pin
Canada/Japan/
U. S. A.
South Africa/
All Other
Countries
United Kingdom
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Ring
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Tip
Ring
Tip
Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Ring
Ring
Tip
Not Used
Not Connected
Not Connected
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
C-22 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3263/3268)
4-wire leased line connections are made via the 2W/4W LEASE interface.
Table C-11 describes 4-wire leased line interface pinouts.
Table C-11.
4-Wire Leased Line Interface (Models 3263/3268)
Hong Kong/
Dial Line
Connector Pin
Canada/Japan/
U. S. A.
South Africa/
All Other
Countries
United Kingdom
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TX Ring
TX Tip
Not Used
Not Used
RX Tip
TX Ring
TX Tip
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
RX Tip
RX Tip
TX Ring
TX Tip
TX Tip
TX Ring
RX Ring
RX Ring
RX Tip
RX Ring
Not Connected
Not Connected
RX Ring
Delayed and Forbidden Lists
When operating in certain countries, the modem processes call attempt failures as
delayed and forbidden calls. This section describes how delayed/forbidden lists
operate in each country that supports this feature.
Australia—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds 10 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, nine subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of 10 calls, the number is placed on
the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the
number is available for dialing.
Country-Specific Information C-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Austria—Forbidden Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as forbidden calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the forbidden list
• The forbidden list is full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as forbidden calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call, or
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, 11 subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If either
of the above call failure conditions occur more than 12 times, the number is placed
on the forbidden list, and calls to this number are not allowed.
Belgium—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option.
*
For these call failure conditions, three subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls, within one hour, the
number is placed on the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes. After
60 minutes, the number is available for dialing.
C-24 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finland—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, four subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of five calls, within one hour, the
number is placed on the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes. After 60
minutes, the number is available for dialing.
France—Delayed and Forbidden Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed and forbidden calls, according
to PTT regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed or forbidden list
• The delayed or forbidden lists are full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
The following criteria determine on which list the number is placed:
• Delayed List. The modem detects one of the following “delay conditions:”
— The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call
— The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT)
*
option
If one or both of these conditions is detected for six consecutive calls, the
number is placed on the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes.
After 60 minutes, the number is available for dialing.
• Forbidden List. The modem detects a “forbidden condition:”
— A call is dialed by the modem, and answered by a remote modem, but an
Answer Back Tone (ABT) is not detected by the calling modem
— A call is manually aborted via the front panel or the V.25 bis ACU
If the modem detects two occurrences of a forbidden condition for a number
within a 2-minute period, the number is placed on the forbidden list and no calls
are allowed to this number. If the call is successfully dialed within the
2-minute period, the forbidden condition is cleared. If not, the number remains
on the forbidden list, and calls to this number are not allowed until the modem is
powered down and then turned on again.
Country-Specific Information C-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hong Kong—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds five numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, three subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls, the number is placed
on the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 15 minutes. After 15 minutes, the
number is available for dialing.
Ireland—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call, or
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, three subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls, within one hour, the
number is placed on the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes. After
60 minutes, the number is available for dialing.
C-26 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Netherlands—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call, or
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, 14 subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of 15 calls, within one hour, the
number is placed on the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes. After
60 minutes, the number is available for dialing.
Norway—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call
• No dial tone was detected
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, nine subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of ten calls, the number is placed on
the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 30 minutes. After 30 minutes, the
number is available for dialing.
Country-Specific Information C-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Spain—Delayed Call Lists
The modem processes call attempt failures as delayed calls, according to PTT
regulations. Before dialing a number, the modem determines whether:
• The number is on the delayed list
• The delayed list is full (the list holds 16 numbers)
In either case, the number is not dialed. When the modem is turned off and then on
again, the lists are cleared, and the numbers can be dialed.
After dialing, the modem processes the following call failures as delayed calls:
• The modem receives a busy tone after dialing a call
• The call is not answered within the time in the Call Timeout (AT TT) option
*
For these call failure conditions, three subsequent redial attempts are allowed. If the
redial call attempts are unsuccessful after a total of four calls, the number is placed
on the delayed list. Then it cannot be dialed for 60 minutes. After 60 minutes, the
number is available for dialing.
Other Country-Specific Information
This section contains information that applies to the following countries:
• Canada
• Denmark
• Hong Kong
• Spain
• United Kingdom
• U. S. A.
Canada
DOC Registration and Requirements
To comply with the Department of Communications (DOC) registration
requirements, you must give the following information to the telephone company:
• Manufacturer and modem model number: 3265, 3266, 3267, or 3268
• Telephone number(s) to which the modem will be connected
• DOC Registration Number: 725-3906A (Model 3265), 725-3906AB
(Model 3266), 725 4124 AB (Models 3267/3268)
• Load Number: 4
C-28 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Industry Canada Equipment Attachment Limitations
The Industry Canada label on equipment means it has been tested and found to meet
requirements for telecommunications operation and safety in Canada. The label does
not guarantee, however, that the equipment will operate to your satisfaction.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Telenetics agent. If
the equipment malfunctions due to any unauthorized repair or alteration, the
telecommunications company may request that you disconnect the equipment.
Ensure that connection to local telecommunications company facilities is permissible
and that the equipment is installed properly. Compliance with the above conditions
may not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Ground connections for power and telephone lines should be wired to a single
ground line. This may be particularly important in rural areas. These connections
should be made by a qualified electrician. If already installed, the connections should
be inspected by the appropriate electrical inspection authority.
To prevent circuit overload, each piece of equipment is assigned a Load Number
(LN), which denotes the percentage of the total load used by the device in a
telephone loop. This equipment has a load number of 4. You may use any
combination of devices on a loop, subject only to the requirement that the total of
the load numbers of all the devices does not exceed 100.
The standard connecting arrangement codes for the equipment are as follows:
CA02B, CA11A, CA40A, CA41A, and CA45A.
Canadian Emissions Statement
This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference
Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement
sur le mteriél brouilleur du Canada.
Country-Specific Information C-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Panel Pinouts
This section provides the rear panel pinouts for the 3265/3266 Modem,
cross-referenced to the pinouts for the telco jacks supported in Canada.
3265 Modem
Table C-12 describes dial line connector pinouts for RJ jack types.
Table C-12.
DIAL LINE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
Telco Jack Selection
Dial Line
Dial Line
Connector Jack
RJ45S
RJ11C
(CA11A) Line
Leased
Pin No.
Function RJ4MB (CA45A) RJ16C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MB
MB1
MI
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
X
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
X
MIC
PR
X
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
PC
X = active signal.
Table C-13 describes PHONE connector pinouts for RJ jack types.
Table C-13.
PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
Telco Jack Selection
Phone
Connector
Pin No.
Phone Jack
Function
RJ45S
RJ11C
RJ4MB
N/C
N/C
X
(CA45A)
RJ16C
N/C
N/C
X
(CA11A)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
N/C
N/C
MI
N/C
N/C
X
N/C
N/C
Not Used
X
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MIC
N/C
N/C
X
X
X
Not Used
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C = Not Connected. X = active signal.
C-30 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3266 Modem
Table C-14 describes dial line connector pinouts for RJ jack types.
Table C-14.
DIAL Line Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
Telco Jack Selection
Dial Line
Connector Pin
No.
Dial Line
Jack
RJ45S
RJ11C
(CA11A)
Function RJ4MB
(CA45A)
RJ16C
Not Used
Not Used
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MB
MB1
MI
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
X
Not Used
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
MIC
PR
X
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
PC
X = active signal.
Table C-15 describes the Phone connector pinouts for RJ jack types.
Table C-15.
PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
Telco Jack Selection
Phone
Connector
Pin No.
Phone
Jack
RJ45S
RJ11C
(CA11A)
Function
RJ4MB
N/C
N/C
X
(CA45A)
RJ16C
N/C
N/C
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
N/C
N/C
MI
N/C
N/C
X
N/C
N/C
Not Used
X
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
MIC
N/C
N/C
X
X
X
Not Used
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C = Not Connected. X = active signal.
Telco Option (AT&J)
Telco displays only on U.S.A. and Canadian 326X Series Modems. It is used to
select the RJ-jack type. Telco corresponds to the AT&J command as follows:
Front Panel
Option Setting
AT Command
Option Setting
RJ11C
RJ45S
RJ16C
RJ4MB
0, 1
2
3
4
Country-Specific Information C-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Denmark—Blind Dialing
326X Series Modem users in Denmark must comply with the requirements in the
“Regulation Regarding Teleterminal Equipment” (No. 882, October 29, 1992),
available from the Danish Minister of Communications.
The setup of the modem must comply exactly with the restrictions within this
Denmark section and as specified in the Restricted Features Summary in this guide.
The factory default settings are in accordance with this requirement, and the modem
is shipped from Telenetics with compliant settings.
Hong Kong and United Kingdom—BABT Regulations
The following sections outline the BABT regulations as they relate to Telenetics
3265 and 3266 Modem operation in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom.
Compliance with BS6328: Part 1: 1982 Section 8.3
This modem is not suitable for use with circuits employing British
Telecommunications (BT) signaling of 2280 Hz.
The equipment detailed in this guide is designed for use on a 2- or 4-wire point-
to-point private circuit. It is not suitable for omnibus or multipoint circuits.
The frequency range of DC to 200 Hz is not used.
Compliance with BS6328: Part 1: 1982 Section 8.7
There is no DC interaction between the modem and the British Telecommunications
private circuit.
C-32 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compliance with BABTSITS/82/01/C and BABT/SITS/
82005S/D
The approval of this modem for connection to British Telecommunications private
speechband circuits is invalid if the apparatus is subject to any modification not
authorized by the British Approvals Board of Telecommunications (BABT) or if it is
used with or connected to any of the following:
• Internal software that has not been formally accepted by BABT.
• External software or external control apparatus that causes the operation of the
modem or associated call setup equipment to contradict the requirements of the
standards set out in BABT/SITS/82/01/C or BABT/SITS/82/005S/D.
All apparatus connected to this modem and thereby connected directly or indirectly
to British Telecommunications private speechband circuits must be approved
apparatus as defined in Section 16 of the BritishTelecommunications Act of 1981.
Compliance with BS6305 Clause 6.2, BS6320 Clause 7.2
The modem is suitable for connection to the public switched telephone network
(PSTN) provided by BritishTelecommunications PLC or Hull City Council
Telephone Department.
The modem is suitable for household, office, and general indoor use. It is not suitable
for use as an extension to a pay phone, shared service, or 1+1 carrier systems.
The modem has been approved for the use of the following facilities:
• Loop disconnect and MF signaling
• Auto answer
• Auto calling
You may connect the modem to a BT line that has loop-disconnect or MF signaling.
Ringer Equivalence Number (REN)
This modem has a REN value of 3.
The REN is a customer guide that indicates, in approximate terms, the maximum
number of items that may be connected simultaneously to a telephone line. The
REN, obtained by summing the REN values of each of the items of apparatus
connected to the exchange line, should not exceed 4. This value includes BT-
provided instruments, each of which is assumed to have a REN of 1.0 unless
otherwise marked.
Country-Specific Information C-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compliance with BABT/SITS/83/08/A Clause 1.2
The modem cannot allow Auto Call using “999” or other PABX emergency
numbers.
Modes other than 1, 2, or 3 should not be used on the BT PSTN. This modem is a
mode 1 device.
Check the numbers entered during the Auto Call setup phase prior to dialing.
Compliance with BS6789: Section 6.1:1986 Clause 5.2
The modem should not be used in conjunction with other series-connected apparatus
such that the aggregate declared voltage drops of all this apparatus, together with the
voltage drop introduced at 40mA by any separate wiring used to link items of
apparatus, exceeds 2.0V.
For statutory purposes, apparatus connected to the PSTN via a Relevant Branch
System (RBS) is treated as if connected directly to the PSTN. Refer to BS6789
Section 6.1 para 2.4 for the definition of an RBS.
Compliance with BS6789: Section 6.1:1986 Clause 7.3.1.3
When making calls from other apparatus connected to the PSTN via the series
apparatus, difficulties may be experienced in:
• Making calls
• Telephone conversations (by both parties)
If you experience difficulty, refer to the modem supplier, not the network operator.
Compliance with BS6789: Section 6.1:1986 Clause 7.3.1.4
This modem causes a voltage drop of 1.7V at a line current of 40mA.
C-34 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Compliance with DTI 83/009I
This modem has been approved for use of the following facilities:
• Loop disconnect and multifrequency signaling
• Storage of telephone numbers for retrieval by a predetermined code
• Detection of initial proceed indication
• Operation of the absence of proceed indication
• Automatic dialing facilities
• Tone detection, i.e., Ring Tone, etc.
• Multiple repeat attempt facility
• Automatic clearing from call originating end
• Call progress monitor
• Series connection
• Modem
• PBX timed break register recall
• Auto answer
Any other usage will invalidate the approval of the apparatus if, as a result, it ceases
to conform to the standards against which approval was gained.
This apparatus is only approved for compatible PBXs. Telenetics should be con-
sulted for an up-to-date list of compatible PBXs.
There is no guarantee that the apparatus will work in all circumstances. Any
difficulty should be referred to Telenetics.
This apparatus is suitable for connection to a PABX which returns secondary
proceed indication.
Compliance with BS6301
Only apparatus conforming with BS6301 may be connected to the telephone socket
on the rear of the modem.
Any interconnection between the above socket and the other modem connections,
directly or by way of other apparatus, may produce hazardous conditions on the BT
network. Advice should be obtained from a competent engineer before any such
connection is made.
Compliance with BABT SITS 83/009 Section D
Caution
Do not enter more than two “4” second pauses following the
initial access digit (or digits). Failure to comply with this
requirement may result in unsatisfactory operation.
Country-Specific Information C-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Installation of Telephone Socket
If you need to obtain a suitable British Telecom socket or extension, make a
photocopy of the following form, complete all the necessary information, and return
it to your local telephone sales office.
Application for Installation of Telephone Socket
Complete this application and send it to your local telephone sales office only if a
suitable British Telecom socket or extension is required.
I am the owner of a ____________________________________________ modem.
Model _____________________________________________________________
Approval Number ____________________________________________________
Please arrange to fit two new plan modular sockets as soon as possible.
Name ______________________________________________________________
Address ____________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
Telephone Numbers __________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
Date _____________________ Signed___________________________________
U. S. A.
FCC Registration
This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules. On the bottom of your 3260,
or 3261 Modem, the nameplate label contains the FCC registration number and
ringer equivalence number (REN) for your modem. If requested by the telephone
company, you must provide this information.
This equipment supports the following USOC service codes (switched analog dial):
RJ11C, RJ16C, RJ45S, and RJ4MB.
The REN is used to determine the number of devices that can be connected to the
telephone line. Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not
ringing in response to an incoming call. In most, but not all areas, the sum of the
RENs should not exceed five.
To be certain of the number of devices that can be connected to the line, as
determined by the total RENs, contact the telephone company to determine the
maximum REN for the calling area.
C-36 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company will
notify you. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company will notify you
as soon as possible. Also, you will be advised of your rights to file a complaint with
the FCC if you believe it is necessary.
The telephone company may make changes to its facilities, equipment, operations,
and procedures that can affect the operation of your modem. If this happens, the
telephone company provides you advance notice for making the necessary
modifications to your modem to maintain uninterrupted service.
Also, this equipment cannot be used on telephone company-provided coin service.
Connection to a party line is subject to state tariffs.
If you experience problems with this equipment, contact Telenetics for repair and/or
warranty information. If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network, the
telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network
until the problem is resolved.
FCC Regulations
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U. S. A. has published
regulations that govern the allowable limits of emissions of radio frequency energy
for computing devices and associated peripherals. These regulations are concerned
with interference to radio communications, such as radio and television. The
regulations require equipment for end use in the U. S. A. to be labeled and to be
accompanied by the warning which appears on the Notice page at the beginning of
this manual.
There is no guarantee, however, that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If it does, you may be required, at your own expense, to take whatever
measures are necessary to correct the situation.
Interference to radio or television reception can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on. If interference is present, try the following:
• Reorient the receiving antenna.
• Relocate the equipment with respect to the receiver.
• Move the equipment away from the receiver.
• Plug the equipment into a different outlet so that the equipment and the receiver
are on different branch circuits.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/television technician.
You may find the following booklet prepared by the FCC helpful: How to Identify
and Resolve Radio-TV Interference Problems, available from the U.S. Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402 (Stock No. 004-000-00345-4).
Country-Specific Information C-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dial Line Jack Types
The Federal Communication Commission (FCC) is a telecommunications and
standards organization that specifies a series of registered jacks for use with a dial
line network or General SwitchedTelephone Network (sometimes referred to as
PSTN). These jacks are designated as RJxxx-type jacks, where RJ means Registered
Jack and xxx specifies the jack series. For example, RJ11 indicates a registered jack
from series 11. Sometimes the jack designation is followed by a letter (RJ11C) that
indicates the jack housing style. Jacks specified under FCC Part 68 fit into one of the
following categories: Permissive (voice) or Programmable (data).
6-Pin Voice Jack (Permissive)
This jack type primarily allows voice signals transmitted across lines designated for
voice transmission. This jack type also allows data signals to be transmitted across
voice-grade lines.
8-Pin Data Jack (Programmable)
This jack type is designed to ensure voiceband data transmission integrity across an
interface cable. The jack is referred to as “programmable” because it contains a
resistor that allows the phone company to adjust for the optimum output power level
before the DCE is connected to the line. The following jack types can be used with
your modem.
Jack Type Description
RJ11C
This 6-pin modular jack type is the most common permissive data mode (voice) jack
arrangement found in the home or office. This jack operates on a single-line bridged
tip-and-ring voice or low-speed data application service.
RJ16C
RJ45S
This 6-pin modular jack type is a special permissive data mode jack arrangement that
allows use of an exclusion-key telephone.
This 8-pin modular jack type is the most common programmable data mode (data) jack
arrangement; it permits the use of an exclusion-key telephone. This jack also operates
on a single-line bridged tip-and-ring voice or low-speed data application service.
RJ4MB
This 8-pin modular programmable data mode jack arrangement supports Make Busy
operation. Using this jack type, you can make the modem appear to be off-hook to the
central telephone office.
NOTE: Jack type is defined to the modem using the Telco option in the TELCO OPT'S menu. For
C-38 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Panel Pinouts
This section provides modem rear panel pinouts, cross-referenced to the pinouts for
the telco jacks supported in the U. S. A.
3260 Modem
Table C-16 describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts for RJ jack types. X indicates
the signal is active.
Table C-16.
DIALLINE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
TELCO Jack Selection
DIAL Line
Jack
DIAL LINE
Leased
Connector Pin No. Function RJ4MB RJ45S RJ16C RJ11C Line
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MB
MB1
MI
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Not Used Not Used
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
X
MIC
PR
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used Not Used
PC
Table C-17 describes PHONE connector pinouts for RJ jack types. X indicates the
signal is active.
Table C-17.
PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
TELCO Jack Selection
PHONE Connector PHONE Jack
Pin No.
Function
RJ4MB
N/C
N/C
X
RJ45S
N/C
N/C
X
RJ16C
N/C
N/C
X
RJ11C
N/C
1
N/C
2
N/C
N/C
3
MI
Not Used
X
4
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
6
MIC
N/C
X
X
X
Not Used
N/C
7
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
8
N/C
N/C
N/C = Not Connected
Country-Specific Information C-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3261 Modem
Table C-18 describes DIAL LINE connector pinouts for RJ jack types. X indicates
the signal is active.
Table C-18.
DIAL LINE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
TELCO Jack Selection
PHONE Connector PHONE Jack
Pin No.
Function
RJ4MB
RJ45S
RJ16C
Not Used
Not Used
X
RJ11C
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
X
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MB
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Not Used
MB1
MI
Not Used
X
X
X
X
X
X
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
MIC
PR
X
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
Not Used
PC
Table C-19 describes PHONE connector pinouts for RJ jack types. X indicates the
signal is active.
Table C-19.
PHONE Connector Pinouts for Jack Operation
TELCO Jack Selection
PHONE Connector PHONE Jack
Pin No.
Function
RJ4MB
N/C
N/C
X
RJ45S
N/C
N/C
X
RJ16C
N/C
N/C
X
RJ11C
N/C
1
N/C
2
N/C
N/C
3
MI
Not Used
X
4
Ring
Tip
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
6
MIC
N/C
X
X
X
Not Used
N/C
7
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
N/C
8
N/C
N/C
N/C = Not Connected
C-40 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dial and Leased LineTransmit Levels
Dial Line Transmit Level
Your 3260, 3261, 3262, or 3263 Modem does not support the DL TX option.You
select the dial line transmit level through the Telco option in the TELCO OPT’s
category. Use the following as a guide:
Telco Jack Selection Dial Transmit Level
RJ11C (Permissive)
-9 dBm
RJ45S (Programmable)
Programmable transmit level. The transmit level is -12 dBm if pins 7
and 8 on the jack are open (not connected).
Otherwise, the transmit level will be determined by the programming
resistor value (contact the Telco for further information).
Leased LineTransmit Level
Front Panel Option: LL TX Level
Factory Default: 0 dBm
The leased line transmit level for the 3260, 3261, 3262, or 3263 Modem is adjustable
from 0 to -15 dBm in 1 dBm increments.
Making Telephone-to-Modem Connections
To use a telephone with your modem, connect the telephone cable to the PHONE
jack at the rear of the modem.
Connecting an Exclusion Key Telephone
In some cases, you can connect an exclusion key telephone to the modem for manual
dialing and answering or normal voice communication. This allows you to answer
and initiate calls manually with the telephone and then connect the modem to the line
by switching the exclusion key. Install an exclusion key telephone as follows:
1) Connect the exclusion key telephone to the RJ36 jack if your modem is
connected to an RJ4MB/RJ36, RJ45S/RJ36, or RJ16C/RJ36 combination.
2) Connect the 8-pin modular cable from the modem DIAL LINE jack to the
RJ11C, RJ4MB, RJ45S, or RJ16C data jack.
Connect the exclusion key telephone to the PHONE jack on the rear panel if
your modem is not connected to an RJ36 jack combination.
3) From the TELCO OPT'S menu, set the Telcooption to a jack type (RJ16C,
RJ45S, or RJ4MB) supporting the exclusion key feature.
Country-Specific Information C-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Telco Option (AT&J)
Telco displays only on U. S. A. and Canadian 326X Series Modems. It is used to
select the RJ-jack type. Telco corresponds to the AT&J command as follows:
Option Setting
RJ11C
AT Command
0, 1
2
RJ45S
RJ16C
3
RJ4MB
4
Declaring The Jack Type
Once 326x Ready displays, you must declare the jack type you used to connect your
modem to the dial/leased line so that the modem recognizes this connection
1) Press
2) Use
until TELCO OPT'S is displayed.
to move through the TELCO OPT'S menu until Telco = jack type is
displayed. For example, you may see Telco = RJ16C in the display.
3) Press
until you see the jack type you used to connect your modem to the
dial/leased line. For example, you can select Telco:RJ11C.
4) Press . In this example Telco = RJ11C is displayed.
You have now declared to the modem the jack type you are using.
If this is the first-time you are installing the modem, the modem is set
(factory default) for connection to an RJ11C permissive jack. Installation is
complete.
If this is not a first-time installation, connect the modem to an RJ45S
programmable jack and set the Telco option for this jack type. To use a
programmable jack, contact your telephone company to arrange for installation.
NOTE: You can also select the dial line jack type using the AT&J command.
Refer to Appendix A for details.
C-42 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Modular Nest Backplane’s Busy Out Feature
This section applies to the following countries, which use the “Universal
International” (UI) Modular Nest enclosure backplane:
• Australia
• Belgium
• Canada
• Denmark
• Finland
• Ireland
• Israel
• Norway
• Sweden
• Switzerland
• U. S. A.
This section also is of interest to users in Hong Kong and the United Kingdom.
Make Busy versions of Modular Nest 9 and Modular Nest 21 backplanes (which
install in a Modular Nest enclosure with card modems) come equipped with the
Busy Out feature. This feature causes a Busy Out modem to “appear busy” to the
central office when:
• Power is disconnected from the Modular Nest enclosure
• The modem card is not present in its slot
• Busy Out=ON (the option is set through the front panel menu, the AT ACU, or
a network manager)
Busy Out is intended for use with Model 3262 and 3267 dial modems. In some
countries, it is also used in dial-restoral mode on Model 3263 and 3268 leased
modems.
Country-Specific Information C-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Make Busy backplanes are factory configured for Busy Out operation in their
Table C-20. Backplane Pin Settings for Busy Out, Modular Nest 9
Pin Pair Function
U. S. A. and Canada:
Other UI Countries:
1
Left
TIP and RING
No jumper connector
Connected with jumper
1
Right
Make Busy and Make Connected with jumper
Busy 1
No jumper connector; not
applicable
1Inner backplane surface, as viewed from the rear of the Modular Nest.
Table C-21. Backplane Pin Settings for Busy Out, Modular Nest 21
Pin Pair Function
U. S. A. and Canada:
Other UI Countries:
1
Left
Make Busy and
Connected with jumper
No jumper connector; not
applicable
Make Busy 1
1
Right
TIP and RING
No jumper connector
Connected with jumper
1Inner backplane surface, as viewed from the rear of the Modular Nest.
Warning
Only qualified service personnel should remove pin jumpers.
A qualified service person is one who is familiar with product
operation, trained in the technology of electrically powered
information processing and business equipment and
adequately aware of the hazards associated with this
equipment. Removal by unqualified personnel could result in
personal injury or equipment damage, which could
jeopardize your warranty and maintenance agreement. Users
who are not qualified to perform this action themselves should
contact Telenetics or an authorized distributor regarding
available upgrade services.
C-44 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avertissement
Seul un personnel qualifié est autorisé à enlever les cavaliers.
Nous appelons qualifiée toute personne familière avec le
fonctionnement du produit, ayant suivi
une formation dans la technique du traitement de l’information
et des équipements de bureau par système électrique et
connaissant les dangers liés à ces équipements. Le recours à un
personnel non qualifié pour cette opération risque d’entraîner
des dommages corporels et matériels ainsi que l’invalidité
éventuelle du contrat de garantie et de maintenance. Nous
conseillons aux utilisateurs non qualifiés pour effectuer cette
procédure de contacter Telenetics ou un distributeur agréé pour
obtenir une liste des services de mise à jour disponibles.
Warnung
Kontaktstiftüberbrückungen sollten nur von qualifiziertem
Kundendienstpersonal entfernt werden. Ein qualifizerter
Kundendiensttechniker ist vertraut mit dem
Betrieb des Produkts, ausgebildet für die Technologie der mit
Strom versorgten Datenverarbeitung und
Unternehmensgeräten sowie informiert über die Gefahren, die
von diesen Geräten ausgehen können. Werden diese
Komponenten von unqualifiziertem Personal entfernt, kann
dies Verletzungen von Personen oder Geräteschäden zur
Folge haben und Ihre Garantie- und Wartungsvereinbarung
gefährden. Anwender, die keine Berechtigung zum
Durchführen dieses Vorgangs besitzen, sollten Upgradedienste
von Telenetics oder einem autorisierten Händler anfordern.
Country-Specific Information C-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
planes. Modular Nest 9s have a similar layout.
Modem A
Modem B
Pins
Jumpers on
Left Pin Pairs
Pins
Modular Nest 21
Enclosure, Rear View
Figure C-10. Modular Nest Backplane Pin Locations
(Modular Nest 21 Shown)
In Hong Kong and the United Kingdom, Busy Out backplanes are hard-wired for
Busy Out operation. These backplanes do not use pin jumpers.
C-46 Country-Specific Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Glossary
This glossary defines terms used in data communications and in the 326X Series Modem documentation set.
ACU
Automatic Calling Unit or Auto-Call Unit. Internal or external to the DCE, the ACU is a
command set interface between the attached DTE and the modem that uses the normal DTE/
DCE interface. The ACU allows for direct modem control and configuration by the DTE.
Analog signal
In data communications, a continuously varying signal (such as the human voice), which
conventional telephone lines are designed to transmit. For transmission on these lines, the
digital output from a computer or terminal must be converted to an analog signal.
ASCII
American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A method of coding digital signals
using seven bits (or eight bits with parity) to generate 96 different characters.
Asynchronous
Auto-answer
Baud
Data without an accompanying time signal. Timing is derived from the asynchronous data
with character boundaries defined by start and stop bits.
Automatic answering. A modem responds to an incoming call over a dial line and
establishes contact with a remote modem.
The rate at which discrete signal elements are transmitted. In asynchronous transmission,
baud rate=bit rate. In most synchronous transmissions, the baud rate is an integer
submultiple of the bit rate. For example, in V.22 bis QAM modulation, four bits are sent in
each baud. If the baud rate is 600, V.22 bis transmits at 2400 (600 x 4) bits per second (bps).
Baudot code
Baud rate
BCC
A method of coding digital signals using five bits to generate 58 different characters.
See Baud.
Block check character. A unique number derived from data transmitted in a block. The
character is appended to data blocks for use in determining whether a block is received with
errors.
BER
Bit Error Rate. The percentage of bit errors relative to a specific number of bits received;
usually expressed as a number referenced to a power of 10.
Binary
A base two numerical representation system using two digits, 0 (zero) and 1 (one); in the
case of a computer, Off and On.
Bit
A blend of the two words binary and digit. The smallest unit in a byte of information,
expressed as 0 (zero) or 1 (one).
Bit-oriented
Block error
A communications protocol or transmission procedure in which control information is
encoded in fields of one or more bits. Compare with Character-Oriented.
(1) A specified number of transmitted data bits over which an encoding procedure is applied
for error-control purposes. A specified number of data characters or bits. (2 ) Aquantity of
transmitted information, or data, usually determined by its own starting and ending control
characters.
bps
The rate at which data passes over the telephone line, in bits per second.
Glossary-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Busy out
An indication to a Central Office that a subscriber line is not available to answer incoming
calls. The availability and implementation of Busy Out varies by country.
Byte
An 8-bit sequence of binary digits (bits) taken as a single unit by a computer.
CCITT. See ITU.
Consultative Committee on International Telephone andTelegraph. International data
communications standards group.
Character
A group of bits used to represent one digit, letter, or symbol (often in 7- or 8-bit groups).
Character-oriented
A communications protocol that carries control information encoded in fields of one or
more characters. Compare with Bit-Oriented.
Control characters
CRC
In data communications, any additional transmitted characters that control or facilitate data
transmission between data terminals.
Cyclic Redundancy Check. A BCC error-checking mechanism for link-level data
transmission.
Crossover cable
CTS
Special DTE/DCE interface cable that reassigns signals from specific pins, thus allowing
normal data transfer between two DTEs or two DCEs at the same site.
Clear To Send. The signal passed from the local modem to the local terminal when the data
port is ready to transmit data. Usually occurs in response to RequestTo Send (RTS).
Data compression,
synchronous
See Synchronous Data Compression.
dB
Decibel. A unit used to express relative difference in power between acoustic or electric
signals, equal to ten times the common logarithm of the ratio of the two power levels. An
increase of 3 dB is equal to doubling the power; a decrease of 3 dB is equal to halving the
power.
dBm
DCD
A measure of power in communications: the decibel referenced to one milliwatt into a
600-ohm load (0 dBm = 1 milliwatt).
Data Carrier Detect. Also known as the Received Line Signal Detector (RLSD). This signal
is passed from a local modem to a local DTE when an acceptable carrier signal is received
by the modem over the telephone line.
DCE
Data Communications Equipment. A modem or other data transmission device.
Demodulation
In data communications, retrieval of an original digital data signal from a modulated analog
signal.
Digital signal
DSR
The binary 0 (off) and 1 (on) output of a data terminal. Modems convert digital signals into
analog waves for transmission over conventional telephone lines.
Data Set Ready. This signal is passed from the local modem. Indicates that the local modem
is ready to enter the data transmission phase.
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment. End user devices that generate or receive data and that provide
data communications control functions. Examples include: central processing units (CPUs),
front-end processors (FEPs), high-speed multiplexers, PCs, user terminals, and so on.
2-Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DTMF
EBCDIC
Echo
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. A signaling method used for push-button telephones that
combines two output signals to create a unique tone for each of the 12 keys.
Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code. A method of coding digital signals
using eight bits to generate 256 different characters.
Reflection back to the sender of a transmitted signal (as heard on telephone circuits
involving long distances, or poor transmission facilities).
EIA
Electronic Industries Association. The American electronics standards group.
EIA/TIA 232-D
The most commonly used computer/modem interface. An electrical standard for
interconnecting data communications equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment (DTE)
established by EIA. (The pinout is the same as for EIA 232-C and is nearly equivalent to
ITU V.24.)
EOT
ETX
End-of-transmission control character in character-oriented protocols (applied to BISYNC).
Tells the receiver that all user data (text) has been sent.
End-of-text control character. Tells the receiver that the end of a message has been reached.
Exclusion key
telephone
Allows calls to be answered manually and transferred to the modem using an integral
exclusion key.
Fallback
Switching the data system to a lower transmission speed either for reduced traffic during
off-peak hours or because of distortion in the telephone system.
Fall forward
Flow control
Switching from a lower to a higher data rate.
Controls data transfer between endpoints in a data network; line signals or flow control
characters stop and start the flow of data.
Four-wire
Full-duplex
Frame
A circuit containing two pairs of wires, one pair for each transmission direction.
A signaling circuit that allows simultaneous 2-way transmission and reception.
A group of bits transmitted serially over a communications channel. The basic data
transmission unit used with bit-oriented protocols.
Gain
The amount by which an amplifier (or power) increases the amplitude of a signal passing
through it; often represented in dB.
Half-duplex
HDLC
A circuit that allows alternating transmit and receive signals, but not both simultaneously.
High-level data link control. ITU-specified, bit-oriented, data-link control protocol; any
related control of data links by specified series of bits rather than by control characters.
Hexadecimal
ITU. See CCITT
ITU -T
Base 16 number system with digits ranging from 0 to F.
International Telecommunications Union. Formerly CCITT.
Telecommunication Standardization Sector of ITU.
ITU V.13
V.13 signaling allows your modem to communicate with non-Telenetics modems. This
signaling operates when the modem is configured for synchronous mode.
ITU V.22 bis
2400 bps modem standard for use with dial and leased-line circuits.
Glossary-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ITU V.24
An electrical standard for interconnecting data communications equipment and data
terminal equipment established by the ITU. It is the most commonly used computer/modem
interface. Nearly equivalent to EIA/TIA 232-D.
ITU V.25 bis
ITU V.32
An ITU-specified serial Auto-Call Unit (ACU) for operation with both asynchronous and
synchronous DTE equipment.
The standard for 2-wire, full-duplex modems operating at up to 9600 bps for use on the
general switched telephone network and on leased telephone circuits.
ITU V.32 bis
A modulation standard that extends the speed of 2-wire leased line and 2-wire dial line
modems to include 14.4 and 12.0 kbps. It is backwards-compatible with the V.32
modulation mode. When operating in the V.32 bis modulation mode, the modem supports
synchronous and asynchronous transmission rates of 4.8, 7.2, 9.6, 12.0, and 14.4 kbps.
ITU V.42
Used with full-duplex asynchronous data transmission, V.42 is an ITU-adopted standard
which specifies two methods of error correction for modems: MNP 4 and LAPM (Link
Access Protocol for Modems).
ITU V.42 bis
Used with full-duplex asynchronous data transmission, V.42 bis is a high-performance data
compression algorithm based on the Lempel-Ziv Data Compression algorithm. This
compression technique is not compatible with MNP 5 or other MNP levels. The theoretical
limit of V.42 bis is 4:1 compression. The actual compression (throughout) that is achieved
with any algorithm, including V.42 bis is data (file) dependent. Using V.42 bis, the modem
continuously monitors the compressibility of user data. If user data is not compressible, the
V.42 bis algorithm detects this condition and automatically turns data compression off, so
the data link rate is never less than the modem modulation rate.
ITU-TS V.34
Interface
V.34 is a four-dimensional trellis-coded modulation standard using precoding and
pre-emphasis equalization schemes.
A shared connection or boundary between two devices or systems. The point (logical or
physical) at which two devices or systems are linked.
LAPM
Link Access Protocol for Modems. An ITU link layer protocol for modems.
Leased line
A dedicated telephone-line circuit permanently connecting two or more locations and used
solely by one customer, who leases the line.
LED
Light Emitting Diode.
Loopback
(1) A method of feeding a received signal back from a point in a data link to the receiver at
the site where the data was originated. Commonly used to test portions of a data link to
isolate faulty equipment or data lines. (2) The feeding back of data from a point in a data
path to the transmitting source for testing. (3) A diagnostic procedure that sends a test
message back to the originator, which compares the message with the original transmission.
Loopback testing can occur within a locally attached device or can be conducted remotely
over a communications circuit.
LPDA2
Modem
Feature that enables the 326X to be used in an IBM dial and leased line restoral applications
using LPDA2 Dial and Disconnect commands.
Modulator/demodulator, enabling digital data to be sent over analog transmission facilities.
4-Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Modulation
MNP
Systematic changing of properties (e.g., amplitude, frequency, phase) of an analog signal to
encode and convey digital information.
Microcom Networking Protocol. An asynchronous communications protocol that provides
error correction.
Multiplexer
(1) Any multiport device that allows two or more users to share a common physical
transmission channel; employed in pairs, one at each end of the channel, where each device
performs both multiplexing of the multiple user inputs and demultiplexing of the channel
back into the separate user data streams. (2) A device that allows two or more analog data
signals to be transmitted simultaneously over a single telephone line.
Off-hook
Parity bit
The description for when a telephone or modem connects to the dial line and presents
electrical characteristics, similar to when a telephone handset is removed from the cradle.
An error-checking mechanism for asynchronous transmission. An additional nondata bit
added to a group of bits, that indicates whether the number of 1’s in the group is odd or even.
PBX
Private branch exchange. A telephone switching system located on a customer’s premises.
Phase jitter
The deviation in phase of the transmitted analog signal from its timing signal; often caused
by alternating current components in a telecommunications network. It is continuous,
long-term, and often nearly constant in frequency and severity.
Point-to-point
Port
A line that directly connects two end points (e.g., a remote location to a host computer);
opposite of multipoint.
A connector and associated circuitry enabling digital data to be injected into or retrieved
from a communications network.
Protocol
Formal set of rules governing the format, timing, sequencing, and error control of
exchanged messages on a data network.
PSTN
PTT
Public Switched Telephone Network.
Postal Telegraph and Telephone. Government authority (in many European companies) that
typically operates the public telecommunications network, sets standards and policies, and
negotiates communications issues internationally for a particular country.
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation. A type of modulation that varies both the phase and
amplitude of an analog wave.
RS-232-D
RTS
See EIA/TIA 232-D.
Request To Send. The signal from a terminal to its co-located modem that prepares the
modem for data transmission.
SDC
See Synchronous Data Compression.
SDLC
Start bit
Stop bit
STX
Synchronous data link control; bit-oriented protocol developed by IBM.
A data bit used in asynchronous transmission to signal the beginning of a character.
A data bit used in asynchronous transmission to signal the end of a character.
Start of text control character. Designates the start of a message's text as well as (usually) the
end of the message heading.
Glossary-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYN
Sync character. Establishes synchronism and fills time in the absence of any data or control
character to maintain synchronism.
Synchronous
Data accepted or provided with an accompanying time signal.
Synchronous Data
compression (SDC)
An algorithm that allows the modem to run at a DTE rate higher than the DCE rate. This is
accomplished by receiving frames of data at the originating end, compressing, and then
transmitting the data at the slower DCE rate, and decompressing the data at the receiving
side. The compression algorithm is derived from theV.42bis data compression algorithm.
SDC only applies when synchronous data is framed in HDLC-SDLC-like format.
Tail circuit
Training
A point-to-point, second-tier circuit directly connected (back to back) to the remote modem
of the first-tier circuit. The connection is made using a DCE/DTE crossover cable.
A technique that adjusts modems to current telephone line conditions. The transmitting
modem sends a special training sequence to the receiving modem, which makes necessary
adjustments for line conditions.
Transmission rate
Two-wire
V.22bis
V. 2 4
Bits per second passing over the telephone line or other communications circuitry.
A circuit consisting of one pair of wires.
See ITU V.22bis.
See ITU V.24.
V.25bis
V. 3 2
See ITU V.25bis.
See ITU V.32.
V.32bis
V. 3 4
See ITU V.32bis.
See ITU-TS V.34.
See ITU V.42.
V. 4 2
V.42bis
See ITU V.42bis.
6-Glossary
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Return Procedures
Contents
Equipment Return Procedures ...............................................................................
2
2
2
2
Expiration of Lease ...........................................................................................
Factory Repair ...................................................................................................
Packaging Guidelines for Equipment Return ....................................................
Return Procedures -1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following sections apply to U.S.A. customers only. Other customers with
questions or concerns regarding return procedures should contact their Telenetics
subsidiary or distributor.
Equipment Return Procedures
If you have questions about equipment return procedures, call your local distributor
or call Telenetics at (949) 455-4000.
If you require on-site service or unit-exchange service, call your local distributor or
call Telenetics at (949) 455-4000.
Expiration of Lease
To return equipment upon expiration of a lease agreement, contact Telenetics for
return authorization and instructions. A list of these offices is available on the Tele-
netics website. When you contact the sales office, provide the following information:
• Product name and description
• Serial number
• Customer order number
• Reason for return
Factory Repair
To return equipment for factory repair, call Telenetics at (949) 455-4000 for return
authorization and instructions. When you call, you will be given a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) control number. Mark this number clearly on the shipping
container for ease of identification and faster service. The RMA control number
provides a convenient tracking reference for both parties. Please have the following
information available for each piece of equipment yo ureturn:
• Product name and description
• Serial number
• Failure symptoms
Packaging Guidelines for Equipment Return
Data communications equipment or parts that are to be returned to Telenetics must
be properly packaged to prevent damage in shipment and handling.
If the original packing material and shipping container are available, reuse these
items to return equipment. If these items are not available, it is your responsibility to
package the contents in a manner that protects the equipment from damage during
normal shipping and handling. Responsibility for damage to equipment during
transit must be resolved between you and the carrier. The Logistics Administration
group can provide you with specific packaging instructions upon request.
2- Return Procedures
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Index
Symbols
, 5-13
<> 5-13
Austria C-6
Auto Call Unit (ACU)
LPDA-2 1-5
V.25bis 1-5
Autobaud 5-5
= 3-5
Avertissement xvi
Numerics
B
A
BABT regulations
backplanes 2-5
Belgium C-6
Besondere Hinweise
Beschreibung xvi
Blind dialing
Denmark C-32
bridge 4-16
Buffer delay
A/ 5-7
Access security
Always= C-5
APPC/APPN 4-19
Application examples
SDC 4-22
AT 5-3
AT ACU
C
cables 2-4
Cabling
daisy-chain 2-13
NMS 2-13
Cabling overview
Call progress
entering 5-3
Character formats
Australia C-6
Index-1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
Command mode
leaving 5-8
Configuration options
efficiency 4-21
encoding 4-21
Connectors 2-5
Example
D
Examples
Defaults
Denmark C-7
Dial line jack types
Dialing
F
filters 2-7
Finland C-7
frames 4-21
France C-7
G
Germany C-8
grounding 2-11
DOC
H
requirements C-28
HDLC/SDLC 4-21
Index-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
I
Menu tree
navigating 3-5
messages 2-15
Important xvi
MNP A-43
Installation
MNP-5 A-43
Interfaces
digital B-2
PHONE B-7
N
Ireland C-8
Israel C-8
Italy C-9
ITU-TS
Netherlands C-9
Network Control Port
NETWORK MANAGEMENT INHIBITED
message A-41
J
Jack types
Norway C-10
NRZ/NRZI 4-21
Canada C-29
jacks 2-5
Japan C-9
K
k 5-13
O
L
LAPM A-43
LCD 3-2
LEDs 3-2
Link Problem Determination Aid (LPDA-2)
LPDA-2 3-10
LPDA2 1-5
options 3-5
P
M
parameters 3-5
Malaysia C-9
manual dialing
Index-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PHONE
Pinouts
interface
3260/65 C-18
router 4-16
S
SDC
configuring 4-22
3261/66 C-19
3262/67 C-22
3263/68 C-22
PHONE B-7
self-test 2-15
Serial cable
Software information
Spain C-10
Specifications
pinouts C-39
Poland C-7
Portugal C-10
interfaces
R
PHONE B-7
Re 5-6
Redialing
S-Register
S-Registers
Reliable connection
Result codes
changing values
cross-referenced to AT commands and front
Index-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
